Dahua NVR2108-8P-4KS2 8 Channel Smart 1U 8PoE Lite 4K H.265 User Manual

Network Video Recorder

User's Manual

ZHEJIANG DAHUA VISION TECHNOLOGY CO., LTD. V2.3.0

User's Manual

Foreword

General

This user’s manual (hereinafter referred to be "the Manual") introduces the installation, functions and

operations of the Network Video Recorder (NVR) devices (hereinafter referred to be "the Device").

Read carefully before using the Device, and keep the manual safe for future reference.

Safety Instructions

The following signal words might appear in the manual.

Signal Words Meaning

Indicates a high potential hazard which, if not avoided, will result

in death or serious injury.

Indicates a medium or low potential hazard which, if not avoided,

could result in slight or moderate injury.

Indicates a potential risk which, if not avoided, could result in

property damage, data loss, reductions in performance, or

unpredictable results.

Provides methods to help you solve a problem or save you time.

Provides additional information as a supplement to the text.

Revision History

Version Revision Content Release Time

V2.3.0

●

Added NVR608H-32-XI/NVR608H-64-

XI/NVR608H-128-XI/NVR608RH-32-

XI/NVR608RH-64-XI/NVR608RH-128-XI.

●

Added smart tracking and sub screen

mirroring.

August 2022

V2.2.0 Added AI SSA and Quick Pick. June 2022

V2.1.0 Updated cluster service. April 2022

V2.0.0

●

Added intelligent diagnosis.

●

Added report query.

●

Added resetting password through

DMSS app.

●

Added LLDP.

●

Updated several figures of the local

interface.

March 2022

V1.4.0

Added NVR11HS-W-S2-CE and NVR11HS-W-

S2-FCC.

January 2022

User's Manual

Version Revision Content Release Time

V1.3.0

●

Added some models.

●

Updated the web login page.

●

Added privacy masking.

●

Added AI codec.

November 2021

V1.2.0

Added NVR44-4KS2/I, NVR44-16P-4KS2/I,

NVR48-4KS2/I, and NVR48-16P-4KS2/I.

June 2021

V1.1.0

Combined AI and non-AI models and deleted

discontinued models.

May 2021

V1.0.10 Added several models. April 2021

V1.0.9 Added 6 models. February 2021

V1.0.8 Added 5 models. January 2021

V1.0.7

●

Added 2 models.

●

Added "5.11.7 Cellular Network".

August 2020

V1.0.6

●

Added picture search, picture search

playback, disk health monitoring, and

exporting and importing face database.

●

Updated AI search, human detection,

configuration of face recognition, and

display settings.

May 2020

V1.0.5

Added split tracking, main-sub tracking,

analytics list, configuring video quality

analytics, iSCSI, and cluster service.

May 2020

V1.0.4

●

Added 16 models.

●

Added PoE status, switch, and display.

April 2020

V1.0.3

●

New GUI baseline, replaces all interfaces.

●

Added AI functions.

July 2019

V1.0.2 Updated the description of rear panel. May 2019

V1.0.1

●

Added NVR 5216-16P-I and NVR5216-8P-

I. Updated relevant info.

●

Updated icons on the rear panel.

●

Added video metadata function and

non-motor vehicle detection function.

September 2018

Privacy Protection Notice

As the device user or data controller, you might collect the personal data of others such as their face,

fingerprints, and license plate number. You need to be in compliance with your local privacy

protection laws and regulations to protect the legitimate rights and interests of other people by

implementing measures which include but are not limited: Providing clear and visible identification

to inform people of the existence of the surveillance area and provide required contact information.

About the Manual

●

The manual is for reference only. If there is inconsistency between the manual and the actual

User's Manual

III

product,

●

We are not liable for any loss caused by the operations that do not comply with the manual.

●

The manual would be updated according to the latest laws and regulations of related regions.

For detailed information, see the paper manual, CD-ROM, QR code or our official website. If there

is inconsistency between paper manual and the electronic version, the electronic version shall

prevail.

●

All the designs and software are subject to change without prior written notice. The product

updates might cause some differences between the actual product and the manual. Please

contact the customer service for the latest program and supplementary documentation.

●

There still might be deviation in technical data, functions and operations description, or errors in

print. If there is any doubt or dispute, please see our final explanation.

●

Upgrade the reader software or try other mainstream reader software if the manual (in PDF

format) cannot be opened.

●

All trademarks, registered trademarks and the company names in the manual are the properties

of their respective owners.

●

Please visit our website, contact the supplier or customer service if there is any problem occurred

when using the device.

●

If there is any uncertainty or controversy, please see our final explanation.

User's Manual

Important Safeguards and Warnings

This section introduces content covering the proper handling of the Device, hazard prevention, and

prevention of property damage. Read carefully before using the Device, and comply with the

guidelines when using it.

Transportation Requirements

Transport the Device under allowed humidity and temperature conditions.

Storage Requirements

Store the Device under allowed humidity and temperature conditions.

Operation Requirements

●

Do not place the Device in a place exposed to sunlight or near heat sources.

●

Keep the Device away from dampness, dust, and soot.

●

Install the Device on a stable surface to prevent it from falling.

●

Do not drop or splash liquid onto the Device, and make sure that there is no object filled with

liquid on the Device to prevent liquid from flowing into it.

●

Put the Device in a well-ventilated place, and do not block its ventilation.

●

Operate the Device within the rated range of power input and output.

●

Do not disassemble the Device.

●

Use the Device under allowed humidity and temperature conditions.

Installation Requirements

●

Do not connect the power adapter to the device while the adapter is powered on.

●

Strictly comply with the local electric safety code and standards. Make sure the ambient voltage

is stable and meets the power supply requirements of the device.

●

Do not expose the battery to environments with extremely low air pressure, or extremely high or

low temperatures. Also, it is strictly prohibited to throw the battery into a fire or furnace, and to

cut or put mechanical pressure on the battery. This is to avoid the risk of fire and explosion.

●

Use the standard power adapter or cabinet power supply. We will assume no responsibility for

any injuries or damages caused by the use of a nonstandard power adapter.

●

Do not place the Device in a place exposed to sunlight or near heat sources.

●

Keep the Device away from dampness, dust, and soot.

●

Put the Device in a well-ventilated place, and do not block its ventilation.

●

Install the Device on a stable surface to prevent it from falling.

User's Manual

●

The power supply must conform to the requirements of ES1 in IEC 62368-1 standard and be no

higher than PS2. Please note that the power supply requirements are subject to the device label.

●

The device is a class I electrical appliance. Make sure that the power supply of the Device is

connected to a power socket with protective earthing.

●

Use power cords that conform to your local requirements, and are rated specifications.

●

Before connecting the power supply, make sure the input voltage matches the power

requirements of the Device.

●

When installing the Device, make sure that the power plug and appliance coupler can be easily

reached to cut off power.

●

Install the Device near a power socket for emergency disconnect.

●

It is prohibited for non-professionals and unauthorized personnel to open the Device casing.

User's Manual

Table of Contents

Foreword

........................................................................................................................................................................................................I

Important Safeguards and Warnings

............................................................................................................................................ IV

1 Introduction

............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1

1.1 Overview

........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1

1.2 Features

.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1

2 Front Panel and Rear Panel

............................................................................................................................................................. 4

2.1 Front Panel

.................................................................................................................................................................................... 4

2.1.1 NVR41-4KS2/NVR41-P-4KS2/NVR41-8P-4KS2/NVR41-4KS2/L/NVR41-P-4KS2/L/NVR41-8P-

4KS2/L/NVR21-4KS2/NVR21-P-4KS2/NVR21-8P-4KS2/NVR21-S3/NVR21-P-S3/NVR21-8P-S3

Series

......................................................................................................................................................................................... 4

2.1.2 NVR11HS-S3H/NVR11HS-P-S3H/NVR11HS-8P-S3H/NVR41HS-4KS2/NVR41HS-P-

4KS2/NVR41HS-8P-4KS2/NVR41HS-4KS2/L/NVR41HS-P-4KS2/L/NVR41HS-8P-

4KS2/L/NVR21HS-4KS2/NVR21HS-P-4KS2/NVR21HS-8P-4KS2/NVR21HS-S3/NVR21HS-P-

S3/NVR21HS-8P-S3

............................................................................................................................................................. 5

2.1.3 NVR52-4KS2/NVR52-8P-4KS2/NVR52-16P-4KS2/NVR42-4KS2/NVR42-P-4KS2/NVR42-8P-

4KS2/NVR42-16P-4KS2/NVR42-4KS2/L/NVR42-P-4KS2/L/NVR42-8P-4KS2/L/NVR42-16P-

4KS2/L/NVR5224-24P-4KS2/NVR54-4KS2/NVR54-16P-4KS2/NVR44-4KS2/NVR44-16P-

4KS2/NVR44-4KS2/L/NVR44-16P-4KS2/L/NVR5424-24P-4KS2/NVR58-4KS2/NVR58-16P-

4KS2/NVR48-4KS2/NVR48-16P-4KS2/NVR48-4KS2/L/NVR48-16P-4KS2/L/NVR22-4KS2/NVR22-

P-4KS2/NVR22-8P-4KS2/NVR52-8P-4KS2E/NVR52-16P-4KS2E/NVR54-16P-4KS2E/NVR58-16P-

4KS2E

......................................................................................................................................................................................... 6

2.1.4 NVR21-W-4KS2 Series

................................................................................................................................................... 7

2.1.5 NVR21HS-W-4KS2/NVR11HS-W-S2-CE/NVR11HS-W-S2-FCC Series

...................................................... 8

2.1.6 NVR21-I/NVR21-I2/NVR21-P-I/NVR21-P-I2/NVR21-8P-I/NVR21-8P-I2 Series

................................... 9

2.1.7 NVR22-I/NVR22-I2/NVR22-P-I/NVR22-P-I2/NVR22-8P-I/NVR22-8P-I2/NVR22-16P-I/NVR22-

16P-

I2 Series

......................................................................................................................................................................... 10

2.1.8 NVR21HS-I/NVR21HS-I2/NVR21HS-P-I/NVR21HS-P-I2/NVR21HS-8P-I/NVR21HS-8P-

I2/NVR44-4KS2/I/NVR44-16P-4KS2/I Series

......................................................................................................... 11

2.1.9 NVR48-I/NVR58-I/NVR58-I/L Series

..................................................................................................................... 12

2.1.10 NVR42-I/NVR44-I/NVR54-I/NVR54-I/L/NVR52-I/NVR52-I/L Series

..................................................... 12

2.1.11 NVR48-4KS2/I/NVR48-16P-4KS2/I Series

....................................................................................................... 13

2.1.12 NVR608-32-4KS2 Series

.......................................................................................................................................... 13

2.1.13 NVR608-64-4KS2/NVR608-128-4KS2/NVR608H-XI/NVR608RH-XI Series

..................................... 14

2.1.14 NVR616-4KS2 Series

................................................................................................................................................. 14

2.2 Rear Panel

.................................................................................................................................................................................... 16

2.2.1 NVR21-4KS2/NVR21-P-4KS2/NVR21-8P-4KS2 Series

................................................................................. 16

2.2.2 NVR11HS-S3H/NVR11HS-P-S3H/NVR11HS-8P-S3H/NVR21HS-4KS2/NVR21HS-P-

4KS2/NVR21HS-8P-4KS2/NVR41HS-4KS2/NVR41HS-P-4KS2/NVR41HS-8P-4KS2/NVR41HS-

4KS2/L/NVR41HS-P-4KS2/L/NVR41HS-8P-4KS2/L/NVR21HS-S3/NVR21HS-P-S3/NVR21HS-8P-

............................................................................................................................................................................................... 18

User's Manual

VII

2.2.3 NVR22-4KS2/NVR22-P-4KS2/NVR22-8P-4KS2 Series

................................................................................. 19

2.2.4 NVR52-4KS2/NVR52-8P-4KS2/NVR52-16P-4KS2/NVR52-24P-4KS2/NVR52-8P-4KS2E/NVR52-

16P-4KS2E Series

............................................................................................................................................................... 21

2.2.5 NVR54-4KS2/NVR58-4KS2/NVR54-16P-4KS2/NVR58-16P-4KS2/NVR54-24P-4KS2/NVR58-

16P-4KS2E Series

............................................................................................................................................................... 23

2.2.6 NVR41-4KS2/NVR41-P-4KS2/NVR41-8P-4KS2/NVR41-4KS2/L/NVR41-P-4KS2/L/NVR41-8P-

4KS2/L/NVR21-S3/NVR21-P-S3/NVR21-8P-S3

.................................................................................................... 25

2.2.7 NVR42-4KS2/NVR42-P-4KS2/NVR42-8P-4KS2/NVR42-16P-4KS2/NVR42-4KS2/L/NVR42-P-

4KS2/L/NVR42-8P-4KS2/L/NVR42-16P-4KS2/L Series

.................................................................................... 27

2.2.8 NVR44-4KS2/NVR44-16P-4KS2/NVR44-4KS2/L/NVR44-16P-4KS2/L/NVR44-4KS2/I/NVR44-

16P-4KS2/I Series

............................................................................................................................................................... 29

2.2.9 NVR48-4KS2/NVR48-16P-4KS2/NVR48-4KS2/L/NVR48-16P-4KS2/L/NVR48-4KS2/I/NVR48-

16P-4KS2/I Series

............................................................................................................................................................... 31

2.2.10 NVR21-W-4KS2 Series

.............................................................................................................................................. 33

2.2.11 NVR21HS-W-4KS2Series

......................................................................................................................................... 34

2.2.12 NVR21-I/NVR21-I2 Series

....................................................................................................................................... 35

2.2.13 NVR22-I/NVR22-I2 Series

....................................................................................................................................... 36

2.2.14 NVR21-P-I/NVR21-P-I2 Series

............................................................................................................................... 37

2.2.15 NVR22-P-I/NVR22-P-I2 Series

............................................................................................................................... 38

2.2.16 NVR21-8P-I/NVR21-8P-I2 Series

......................................................................................................................... 39

2.2.17 NVR22-8P-I/NVR22-8P-I2 Series

......................................................................................................................... 39

2.2.18 NVR22-16P-I/NVR22-8P-I2 Series

....................................................................................................................... 40

2.2.19 NVR21HS-I/NVR21HS-I2 Series

........................................................................................................................... 42

2.2.20 NVR21HS-P-I/NVR21HS-P-I2 Series

................................................................................................................... 43

2.2.21 NVR21HS-8P-I/NVR21HS-8P-I2 Series

................................................................................................

............. 44

2.2.22 NVR4208-8P-I Series

................................................................................................................................................. 45

2.2.23 NVR4216-I Series

........................................................................................................................................................ 46

2.2.24 NVR58-I/NVR58-I/L/NVR48-I Series

................................................................................................................... 47

2.2.25 NVR54-I/NVR54-I/L/NVR44-I Series

................................................................................................................... 49

2.2.26 NVR52-16P-I/NVR52-16P-I/L/NVR52-8P-I/NVR52-8P-I/L/NVR42-16P-I Series

............................. 51

2.2.27 NVR608-4KS2/NVR608H-XI/NVR608RH-XI Series

...................................................................................... 54

2.2.28 NVR616-4KS2 Series

................................................................................................................................................. 55

2.2.29 NVR11HS-W-S2-CE/NVR11HS-W-S2-FCC Series

.......................................................................................... 57

2.3 Alarm Connection

.................................................................................................................................................................... 58

2.3.1 Alarm Port

........................................................................................................................................................................ 58

2.3.2 Alarm Input Port

............................................................................................................................................................ 59

2.3.3 Alarm Output Port

........................................................................................................................................................ 60

2.3.4 Alarm Relay Specifications

....................................................................................................................................... 60

2.4 Two-way Talk

............................................................................................................................................................................. 61

User's Manual

VIII

2.4.1 Device-end to PC-end

................................................................................................................................................. 61

2.4.2 PC-end to the Device-end

......................................................................................................................................... 62

3 Device Installation

............................................................................................................................................................................. 63

3.1 Device Installation Diagram

............................................................................................................................................... 63

3.2 Checking Unpacked NVR

..................................................................................................................................................... 64

3.3 HDD Installation

....................................................................................................................................................................... 64

3.3.1 NVR41-4KS2/NVR41-P-4KS2/NVR41-8P-4KS2/NVR41-4KS2/L/NVR41-P-4KS2/L/NVR41-8P-

4KS2/L/NVR21-4KS2/NVR21-P-4KS2/NVR21-8P-4KS2/NVR21-W-4KS2/NVR21-I/NVR21-

I2/NVR21-P-I/NVR21-P-I2/NVR21-8P-I/NVR21-8P-I2/NVR21-S3/NVR21-P-S3/NVR21-8P-S3

...... 64

3.3.2 NVR41HS-4KS2/NVR41HS-P-4KS2/NVR41HS-8P-4KS2/NVR41HS-4KS2/L/NVR41HS-P-

4KS2/L/NVR41HS-8P-4KS2/L/NVR21HS-4KS2/NVR21HS-P-4KS2/NVR21HS-8P-4KS2/NVR21HS-

W-4KS2/NVR11HS-S3H/NVR11HS-P-S3H/NVR11HS-8P-S3H/NVR21HS-I/NVR21HS-

I2/NVR21HS-P-I/NVR21HS-P-I2/NVR21HS-8P-I/NVR21HS-8P-I2/NVR21HS-S3/NVR21HS-P-

S3/NVR21HS-8P-S3/NVR11HS-W-S2-CE/NVR11HS-W-S2-FCC Series

...................................................... 67

3.3.3 NVR22-8P-S2/NVR42-4KS2/NVR42-P-4KS2/NVR42-8P-4KS2/NVR42-16P-4KS2/NVR42-

4KS2/L/NVR42-P-4KS2/L/NVR42-8P-4KS2/L/NVR42-16P-4KS2/L/NVR52-4KS2/NVR52-8P-

4KS2/NVR52-16P-4KS2/ NVR52-24P-4KS2/NVR22-4KS2/NVR22-P-4KS2/NVR22-8P-

4KS2/NVR52-8P-4KS2E/NVR22-I/NVR22-I2/NVR22-P-I/NVR22-P-I2/NVR22-8P-I/NVR22-8P-

I2/NVR22-16P-I/NVR22-16P-I2/NVR42-I/NVR42-8P-I/NVR42-16P-I/NVR52-16P-I/NVR52-16P-

I/L/NVR52-8P-I/NVR52-8P-I/L Series

........................................................................................................................ 69

3.3.4 NVR54-4KS2/NVR54-16P-4KS2/NVR44-4KS2/NVR44-16P-4KS2/NVR44-4KS2/L/NVR44-16P-

4KS2/L/NVR54-24P-4KS2/NVR54-16P-4KS2E/NVR58-I/NVR58-I/L/NVR54-I/NVR54-I/L/NVR52-

I/NVR52-I/L/NVR42-

I/NVR42-8P-I/NVR44-I/NVR48-I/NVR608-32-4KS2/NVR44-4KS2/I/NVR44-

16P-4KS2/I/NVR48-4KS2/I/NVR48-16P-4KS2/I Series

..................................................................................... 71

3.3.5 NVR608-64-4KS2/NVR608-128-4KS2/NVR608H-32-XI/NVR608H-64-XI/NVR608H-128-XI

Series

....................................................................................................................................................................................... 75

3.3.6 NVR616-4KS2 Series

.................................................................................................................................................... 77

3.4 CD-ROM Installation

............................................................................................................................................................... 79

3.5 Connection Sample

................................................................................................................................................................. 83

3.5.1 NVR41-4KS2/NVR41-P-4KS2/NVR41-8P-4KS2/NVR41-4KS2/L/NVR41-P-4KS2/L/NVR41-8P-

4KS2/L/NVR21-4KS2/NVR21-P-4KS2/NVR21-8P-4KS2/NVR21-I/NVR21-I2/NVR21-P-I/NVR21-P-

I2/NVR21-8P-I/NVR21-8P-I2/NVR21-S3/NVR21-P-S3/NVR21-8P-S3 Series

.......................................... 83

3.5.2 NVR21-W-4KS2/NVR21HS-W-4KS2 Series

........................................................................................................ 84

3.5.3 NVR11HS-S3H/NVR11HS-P-S3H/NVR11HS-8P-S3H/NVR41HS-4KS2/NVR41HS-P-

4KS2/NVR41HS-8P-4KS2/NVR41HS-4KS2/L/NVR41HS-P-4KS2/L/NVR41HS-8P-

4KS2/L/NVR21HS-4KS2/NVR21HS-P-4KS2/NVR21HS-8P-4KS2/NVR21HS-I/NVR21HS-

I2/NVR21HS-P-I/NVR21HS-P-I2/NVR21HS-8P-I/NVR21HS-8P-I2/NVR21HS-S3/NVR21HS-P-

S3/NVR21HS-8P-S3 Series

............................................................................................................................................. 85

3.5.4 NVR22-4KS2/NVR22-P-4KS2/NVR22-8P-4KS2/NVR22-I/NVR22-I2/NVR22-P-I/NVR22-P-

I2/NVR22-8P-I/NVR22-8P-I2/NVR22-16P-I/NVR22-16P-I2 Series

.............................................................. 85

3.5.5 NVR52-4KS2/NVR52-8P-4KS2/NVR52-16P-4KS2/NVR52-24P-4KS2/NVR52-8P-4KS2E/NVR52-

16P-4KS2E Series

............................................................................................................................................................... 86

3.5.6 NVR42-4KS2/NVR42-P-4KS2/NVR42-8P-4KS2/NVR42-16P-4KS2/NVR42-4KS2/L/NVR42-P-

4KS2/L/NVR42-8P-4KS2/L/NVR42-16P-4KS2/L Series

.................................................................................... 86

3.5.7 NVR54-4KS2/NVR54-16P-4KS2/NVR58-4KS2/NVR58-16P-4KS2/NVR54-24P-4KS2/NVR54-

User's Manual

16P-4KS2E/NVR58-16P-4KS2E Series

...................................................................................................................... 87

3.5.8 NVR44-4KS2/NVR44-16P-4KS2/NVR44-4KS2/L/NVR44-16P-4KS2/L/NVR44-4KS2/I/NVR44-

16P-4KS2/I Series

............................................................................................................................................................... 87

3.5.9 NVR48-4KS2/NVR48-16P-4KS2/NVR48-4KS2/L/NVR48-16P-4KS2/L/NVR48-4KS2/I/NVR48-

16P-4KS2/I Series

............................................................................................................................................................... 88

3.5.10 NVR58-I/NVR58-I/L/NVR48-I Series

................................................................................................................... 90

3.5.11 NVR54-I/NVR54-I/L/NVR44-I

................................................................................................................................. 90

3.5.12 NVR52-16P-I/NVR52-16P-I/L/NVR52-8P-I/NVR52-8P-I/L/NVR42-8P-I/NVR42-16P-I Series

.. 90

3.5.13 NVR4216-I Series

........................................................................................................................................................ 91

3.5.14 NVR608-4KS2/NVR608H-XI/NVR608RH-XI Series

...................................................................................... 91

3.5.15 NVR616-4KS2 Series

................................................................................................................................................. 92

4 Starting the Device

............................................................................................................................................................................ 93

5 Local Operations

................................................................................................................................................................................. 94

5.1 Initialization

............................................................................................................................................................................... 94

5.2 Startup Wizard

.......................................................................................................................................................................... 96

5.3 Login

........................................................................................................................................................................................... 101

5.4 Main Menu

................................................................................................................................................................................ 103

5.5 Quick Operation Bar

............................................................................................................................................................ 104

5.6 Live View

................................................................................................................................................................................... 106

5.6.1 Live Page

........................................................................................................................................................................ 106

5.6.2 Navigation bar

............................................................................................................................................................ 107

5.6.3 Live View Control Bar

............................................................................................................................................... 108

5.6.3.1 Instant Playback

.............................................................................................................................................. 109

5.6.3.2 Digital Zoom

...................................................................................................................................................... 109

5.6.3.3 Instant Backup

.................................................................................................................................................. 110

5.6.3.4 Manual Snapshot

............................................................................................................................................ 110

5.6.3.5 Two-way Talk

.................................................................................................................................................... 110

5.6.3.6 Stream Switch

................................................................................................................................................... 110

5.6.3.7 Picture Search

................................................................................................................................................... 111

5.6.3.8 Quick Pick

........................................................................................................................................................... 112

5.6.4 Shortcut Menu

............................................................................................................................................................. 114

5.6.5 AI Live View Mode

..................................................................................................................................................... 117

5.6.6 Split Tracking

............................................................................................................................................................... 119

5.6.7 PTZ

................................

..................................................................................................................................................... 121

5.6.7.1 PTZ Settings

....................................................................................................................................................... 121

5.6.7.2 PTZ Control

........................................................................................................................................................ 123

5.6.7.3 Configuring PTZ Functions

........................................................................................................................ 125

5.6.7.3.1 Configuring Presets

............................................................................................................................ 125

User's Manual

5.6.7.3.2 Configuring Tours

................................................................................................................................ 125

5.6.7.3.3 Configuring Patterns

.......................................................................................................................... 126

5.6.7.3.4 Configuring AutoScan

....................................................................................................................... 127

5.6.7.4 Using PTZ Functions

...................................................................................................................................... 128

5.6.7.4.1 Presets

....................................................................................................................................................... 128

5.6.7.4.2 Tours

........................................................................................................................................................... 128

5.6.7.4.3 Patterns

..................................................................................................................................................... 128

5.6.7.4.4 AutoScan

.................................................................................................................................................. 128

5.6.7.4.5 Calling AutoPan

.................................................................................................................................... 128

5.6.7.4.6 Auxiliary Button

.................................................................................................................................... 129

5.6.8 Wireless Pairing

.......................................................................................................................................................... 129

5.6.9 Sequence

........................................................................................................................................................................ 130

5.6.10 Fisheye

.......................................................................................................................................................................... 133

5.6.10.1 Fisheye De-warp on Live View Interface

........................................................................................... 133

5.6.10.2 Fisheye De-warp During Playback

....................................................................................................... 135

5.6.11 Temperature Monitoring

.................................................................................................................................... 135

5.6.12 Shortcut Menu to Add Camera

......................................................................................................................... 136

5.6.13 Smart Tracking

......................................................................................................................................................... 137

5.7 Camera

....................................................................................................................................................................................... 137

5.7.1 Initializing Remote Devices

.................................................................................................................................. 137

5.7.2 Adding Remote Devices

......................................................................................................................................... 140

5.7.2.1 Adding Cameras from Search

................................................................................................................... 141

5.7.2.2 Adding Cameras Manually

......................................................................................................................... 142

5.7.2.3 Importing Cameras

........................................................................................................................................ 144

5.7.3 Changing IP Address of Remote Device

......................................................................................................... 145

5.7.3.1 Changing IP Address of Connected Remote Device

...................................................................... 145

5.7.3.2 Changing IP Address of Unconnected Cameras

.............................................................................. 145

5.7.4 Configuring Image Settings

................................................................................................................................. 146

5.7.5 Configuring Overlay Settings

.............................................................................................................................. 148

5.7.5.1 Overlay

................................................................................................................................................................. 148

5.7.5.2 Privacy Masking

............................................................................................................................................... 149

5.7.6 Configuring Encoding Settings

........................................................................................................................... 150

5.7.6.1 Configuring Audio and Video Encoding Settings

........................................................................... 150

5.7.6.2 Snapshot

............................................................................................................................................................. 152

5.7.7 Modifying Channel Name

...................................................................................................................................... 153

5.7.8 Checking the PoE Status

......................................................................................................................................... 154

5.7.9 Updating Remote Devices

..................................................................................................................................... 155

User's Manual

5.7.10 Viewing Remote Device Information

............................................................................................................ 156

5.7.10.1 Device Status

.................................................................................................................................................. 156

5.7.10.2 Firmware

........................................................................................................................................................... 157

5.8 Recording Management

.................................................................................................................................................... 158

5.8.1 Recording Schedule

.................................................................................................................................................. 158

5.8.1.1 Configuring Video Recording Schedule

.............................................................................................. 158

5.8.1.2 Configuring Snapshot Schedule

.............................................................................................................. 162

5.8.1.3 Configuring Recording Mode

................................................................................................................... 163

5.8.2 Search and Playback

................................................................................................................................................ 164

5.8.2.1 Search Page

....................................................................................................................................................... 164

5.8.2.2 Playback

.............................................................................................................................................................. 167

5.8.2.3 Smart Search Playback

................................................................................................................................. 169

5.8.2.4 Clipping Videos

................................................................................................................................................ 170

5.8.2.5 Backing Up

......................................................................................................................................................... 170

5.8.2.6 File List

................................................................................................................................................................. 171

5.8.2.7 Tag Playback

..................................................................................................................................................... 171

5.8.3 Recording Information

............................................................................................................................................ 173

5.9 AI

................................................................................................................................................................................................... 173

5.9.1 Overview

........................................................................................................................................................................ 173

5.9.2 Smart Plan

..................................................................................................................................................................... 174

5.9.3 Face Detection

............................................................................................................................................................. 175

5.9.3.1 Enabling Smart Plan

...................................................................................................................................... 175

5.9.3.2 Configuring Face Detection

....................................................................................................................... 175

5.9.3.3 AI Search (Face Detection)

.......................................................................................................................... 176

5.9.4 Face & Body Detection

............................................................................................................................................ 178

5.9.4.1 Enabling Smart Plan

...................................................................................................................................... 178

5.9.4.2 Configuring Face & Body Detection

...................................................................................................... 178

5.9.4.3 AI Search (Face & Body Detection)

......................................................................................................... 179

5.9.5 Face Recognition

........................................................................................................................................................ 179

5.9.5.1 Enabling Smart Plan

...................................................................................................................................... 180

5.9.5.2 Creating Face Database

............................................................................................................................... 180

5.9.5.2.1 Creating Local Face Databases

...................................................................................................... 180

5.9.5.2.2 Creating Remote Face Databases

................................................................................................ 181

5.9.5.2.3 Creating the Passerby Database

.................................................................................................. 181

5.9.5.3 Adding Images to Face Database

........................................................................................................... 182

5.9.5.3.1 Adding Face Images One by One

................................................................................................. 182

5.9.5.3.2 Adding Face Images in Batches

.................................................................................................... 185

User's Manual

XII

5.9.5.4 Configuring Face Recognition

.................................................................................................................. 186

5.9.5.4.1 Configuring AI by Recorder

............................................................................................................ 186

5.9.5.4.2 Configuring AI by Camera

............................................................................................................... 187

5.9.5.5 AI Search (Face Recognition)

..................................................................................................................... 188

5.9.5.5.1 Search by Attributes

........................................................................................................................... 188

5.9.5.5.2 Search by Image

................................................................................................................................... 190

5.9.5.5.3 Report Query

.......................................................................................................................................... 191

5.9.6 IVS

...................................................................................................................................................................................... 192

5.9.6.1 Enabling Smart Plan

...................................................................................................................................... 192

5.9.6.2 Configuring IVS

................................................................................................................................................ 192

5.9.6.2.1 Tripwire

..................................................................................................................................................... 192

5.9.6.2.2 Intrusion

................................................................................................................................................... 195

5.9.6.2.3 Abandoned Object Detection

........................................................................................................ 198

5.9.6.2.4 Fast Moving

............................................................................................................................................ 201

5.9.6.2.5 Parking

...................................................................................................................................................... 204

5.9.6.2.6 Crowd Gathering

.................................................................................................................................. 207

5.9.6.2.7 Missing Object Detection

................................................................................................................. 210

5.9.6.2.8 Loitering Detection

............................................................................................................................. 213

5.9.6.3 AI Search (IVS)

................................................................................................................................................... 216

5.9.7 Stereo Analysis

............................................................................................................................................................ 217

5.9.7.1 Enabling Smart Plan

...................................................................................................................................... 218

5.9.7.2 Configuring Stereo Analysis

...................................................................................................................... 218

5.9.7.2.1 People Approach Detection

............................................................................................................ 218

5.9.7.2.2 Fall Detection

......................................................................................................................................... 219

5.9.7.2.3 Violence Detection

.............................................................................................................................. 220

5.9.7.2.4 People No. Exception Detection

................................................................................................... 221

5.9.7.2.5 People Stay Detection

....................................................................................................................... 222

5.9.7.3 AI Search (Stereo Analysis)

........................................................................................................................ 224

5.9.8 Video Metadata

.......................................................................................................................................................... 225

5.9.8.1 Enabling Smart Plan

...................................................................................................................................... 225

5.9.8.2 Configuring Video Metadata

.................................................................................................................... 225

5.9.8.3 AI Search (Video Metadata)

....................................................................................................................... 226

5.9.8.3.1 Human Detection

................................................................................................................................. 226

5.9.8.3.2 Motor Vehicle Detection

.................................................................................................................. 228

5.9.8.3.3 Non-motor Vehicle Detection

........................................................................................................ 230

5.9.8.3.4 Report Query

.......................................................................................................................................... 231

5.9.9 ANPR

................................................................................................................................................................................. 232

User's Manual

XIII

5.9.9.1 Adding Vehicle Blocklist and Allowlist

................................................................................................ 232

5.9.9.2 Configuring ANPR

........................................................................................................................................... 233

5.9.9.3 AI Search (ANPR)

............................................................................................................................................. 235

5.9.10 Crowd Distribution

................................................................................................................................................. 235

5.9.10.1 Enabling Smart Plan

................................................................................................................................... 235

5.9.10.2 Configuring Crowd Distribution

........................................................................................................... 235

5.9.10.3 Report Query

.................................................................................................................................................. 236

5.9.11 People Counting

...................................................................................................................................................... 236

5.9.11.1 Enabling Smart Plan

................................................................................................................................... 236

5.9.11.2 Configuring People Counting

................................................................................................................ 237

5.9.11.3 Configuring In Area No.

............................................................................................................................ 238

5.9.11.4 Queuing

............................................................................................................................................................ 239

5.9.11.5 Report Query

.................................................................................................................................................. 240

5.9.12 Heat Map

..................................................................................................................................................................... 241

5.9.12.1 Enabling Smart Plan

................................................................................................................................... 241

5.9.12.2 Configuring Heat map

............................................................................................................................... 241

5.9.12.3 Report Query

.................................................................................................................................................. 242

5.9.12.3.1 General

................................................................................................................................................... 242

5.9.12.3.2 Fisheye

.................................................................................................................................................... 243

5.9.13 SMD

................................................................................................................................................................................ 244

5.9.13.1 Enabling Smart Plan

................................................................................................................................... 244

5.9.13.2 Configuring SMD

.......................................................................................................................................... 244

5.9.13.3 AI Search (SMD)

............................................................................................................................................. 246

5.9.14 Vehicle Density

......................................................................................................................................................... 246

5.9.14.1 Enabling Smart Plan

................................................................................................................................... 246

5.9.14.2 Configuring Vehicle Density

................................................................................................................... 246

5.9.14.3 Report Query

.................................................................................................................................................. 247

5.9.15 Main-sub Tracking

.................................................................................................................................................. 248

5.9.16 Video Quality Analytics

........................................................................................................................................ 250

5.9.16.1 Configuring Video Quality Analytics

.................................................................................................. 250

5.9.16.2 Analytics List

................................................................................................................................................... 252

5.9.17 Entries Frequency

................................................................................................................................................... 252

5.10 Alarm Settings

..................................................................................................................................................................... 254

5.10.1 Alarm Information

.................................................................................................................................................. 254

5.10.2 Alarm Status

.............................................................................................................................................................. 255

5.10.3 Alarm Input

................................................................................................................................................................ 256

5.10.4 Alarm Output

............................................................................................................................................................ 257

User's Manual

XIV

5.10.5 Video Detection

....................................................................................................................................................... 258

5.10.5.1 Motion Detection

......................................................................................................................................... 258

5.10.5.2 Video Loss

........................................................................................................................................................ 260

5.10.5.3 Video Tampering

.......................................................................................................................................... 261

5.10.5.4 Scene Change

................................................................................................................................................. 261

5.10.5.5 PIR Alarm

.......................................................................................................................................................... 262

5.10.6 Audio Detection

....................................................................................................................................................... 264

5.10.7 Thermal Alarm

.......................................................................................................................................................... 264

5.10.8 Exception

..................................................................................................................................................................... 265

5.10.9 Disarming

.................................................................................................................................................................... 266

5.11 Network

.................................................................................................................................................................................. 268

5.11.1 TCP/IP

............................................................................................................................................................................ 268

5.11.2 Routing Table

............................................................................................................................................................ 270

5.11.3 Port

................................................................................................................................................................................. 271

5.11.4 External Wi-Fi

............................................................................................................................................................ 272

5.11.5 Wi-Fi AP

........................................................................................................................................................................ 274

5.11.5.1 General Settings

........................................................................................................................................... 274

5.11.5.2 Advanced Settings

....................................................................................................................................... 275

5.11.6 3G/4G

............................................................................................................................................................................ 276

5.11.7 Cellular Network

...................................................................................................................................................... 277

5.11.8 Repeater

...................................................................................................................................................................... 279

5.11.9 PPPoE

............................................................................................................................................................................ 281

5.11.10 DDNS

........................................................................................................................................................................... 282

5.11.11 UPnP

............................................................................................................................................................................ 283

5.11.11.1 Configuring Router

................................................................................................................................... 283

5.11.11.2 Configuring UPnP

...................................................................................................................................... 284

5.11.12 Email

........................................................................................................................................................................... 285

5.11.13 SNMP

.......................................................................................................................................................................... 287

5.11.14 Multicast

................................................................................................................................................................... 289

5.11.15 Alarm Center

........................................................................................................................................................... 290

5.11.16 Register

..................................................................................................................................................................... 291

5.11.17 Switch

......................................................................................................................................................................... 292

5.11.18 P2P

............................................................................................................................................................................... 293

5.12 Storage

.................................................................................................................................................................................... 294

5.12.1 Basic

............................................................................................................................................................................... 294

5.12.2 Disk Manager

............................................................................................................................................................ 295

5.12.3 RAID

............................................................................................................................................................................... 296

User's Manual

5.12.3.1 Creating RAID

................................................................................................................................................. 297

5.12.3.2 Viewing RAID Information

....................................................................................................................... 299

5.12.3.3 Creating Hot Spare Disk

............................................................................................................................ 299

5.12.4 Disk Group

.................................................................................................................................................................. 300

5.12.5 Disk Quota

.................................................................................................................................................................. 301

5.12.6 Disk Check

................................................................................................................................................................... 302

5.12.6.1 Manual Check

................................................................................................................................................. 302

5.12.6.2 Detection Report

.......................................................................................................................................... 303

5.12.6.3 Disk Health Monitoring

............................................................................................................................. 305

5.12.7 Record Estimate

....................................................................................................................................................... 306

5.12.7.1 Calculating Recording Time

.................................................................................................................... 307

5.12.7.2 Calculating HDD Capacity for Storage

.............................................................................................. 307

5.12.8 FTP

.................................................................................................................................................................................. 307

5.12.9 iSCSI

............................................................................................................................................................................... 309

5.13 Account

................................................................................................................................................................................... 311

5.13.1 Group

............................................................................................................................................................................ 311

5.13.2 User

................................................................................................................................................................................ 312

5.13.2.1 Adding User

.................................................................................................................................................... 312

5.13.2.2 Changing Password

.................................................................................................................................... 314

5.13.3 Resetting Password

................................................................................................................................................ 315

5.13.3.1 Enabling Password Reset

......................................................................................................................... 315

5.13.3.2 Resetting Password on Local Interface

............................................................................................. 316

5.13.4 ONVIF User

................................................................................................................................................................. 320

5.14 Security

................................................................................................................................................................................... 322

5.14.1 Security Status

.......................................................................................................................................................... 322

5.14.2 System Service

.......................................................................................................................................................... 323

5.14.2.1 Basic Services

................................................................................................................................................. 323

5.14.2.2 802.1x

................................................................................................................................................................. 325

5.14.2.3 HTTPS

................................................................................................................................................................. 326

5.14.3 Attack Defense

......................................................................................................................................................... 326

5.14.3.1 Firewall

.............................................................................................................................................................. 326

5.14.3.2 Account Lockout

........................................................................................................................................... 327

5.14.3.3 Anti-DoS Attack

............................................................................................................................................. 328

5.14.3.4 Sync Time-Allowlist

..................................................................................................................................... 328

5.14.4 CA Certificate

............................................................................................................................................................. 329

5.14.4.1 Device Certificate

......................................................................................................................................... 329

5.14.4.2 Trusted CA Certificate

................................................................................................................................ 331

User's Manual

XVI

5.14.5 Audio/Video Encryption

...................................................................................................................................... 332

5.14.6 Security Warning

..................................................................................................................................................... 333

5.14.6.1 Security Exception

....................................................................................................................................... 333

5.14.6.2 Illegal Login

..................................................................................................................................................... 334

5.15 System

..................................................................................................................................................................................... 335

5.15.1 General

......................................................................................................................................................................... 335

5.15.1.1 General

.............................................................................................................................................................. 335

5.15.1.2 Date and Time

................................................................................................................................................ 337

5.15.1.3 Holiday

.............................................................................................................................................................. 338

5.15.2 Serial Port

.................................................................................................................................................................... 340

5.16 Output and Display

........................................................................................................................................................... 341

5.16.1 Display

.......................................................................................................................................................................... 341

5.16.2 Tour

................................................................................................................................................................................ 342

5.16.3 Custom Layout

.......................................................................................................................................................... 344

5.17 POS

............................................................................................................................................................................................ 346

5.17.1 Settings

........................................................................................................................................................................ 346

5.17.1.1 Privacy Setup

.................................................................................................................................................. 348

5.17.1.2 Connection Mode

......................................................................................................................................... 349

5.17.2 Search

........................................................................................................................................................................... 349

5.18 Audio

........................................................................................................................................................................................ 350

5.18.1 File Management

.................................................................................................................................................... 350

5.18.2 Audio Play

................................................................................................................................................................... 352

5.18.3 Broadcast

.................................................................................................................................................................... 353

5.19 Operation and Maintenance

........................................................................................................................................ 354

5.19.1 Log

.................................................................................................................................................................................. 354

5.19.2 System

.......................................................................................................................................................................... 355

5.19.2.1 System Version

.............................................................................................................................................. 355

5.19.2.2 AI Algorithm Version

.................................................................................................................................. 355

5.19.2.3 HDD Info

........................................................................................................................................................... 356

5.19.2.4 BPS

....................................................................................................................................................................... 356

5.19.2.5 Device Status

.................................................................................................................................................. 357

5.19.3 Network

....................................................................................................................................................................... 358

5.19.3.1 Online User

...................................................................................................................................................... 358

5.19.3.2 Network Load

................................................................................................................................................. 358

5.19.3.3 Network Test

.................................................................................................................................................. 359

5.19.4 Maintenance and Management

....................................................................................................................... 360

5.19.4.1 Device Maintenance

................................................................................................................................... 360

User's Manual

XVII

5.19.4.2 Exporting System Settings

...................................................................................................................... 361

5.19.4.3 Restoring Defaults

....................................................................................................................................... 363

5.19.4.3.1 Restoring Defaults on the Local Interface

............................................................................ 363

5.19.4.3.2 Resetting Device through the Reset Button

........................................................................ 364

5.19.4.4 System Update

.............................................................................................................................................. 365

5.19.4.4.1 Upgrading File

.................................................................................................................................... 365

5.19.4.4.2 Online Upgrade

.................................................................................................................................. 366

5.19.4.4.3 Uboot Upgrading

.............................................................................................................................. 367

5.19.4.5 Intelligent Diagnosis

.................................................................................................................................. 367

5.20 USB Device Auto Pop-up

................................................................................................................................................ 367

5.21 Shutdown

............................................................................................................................................................................... 368

6 Web Operation

.................................................................................................................................................................................. 371

6.1 Network Connection

........................................................................................................................................................... 371

6.2 Web Login

................................................................................................................................................................................. 371

6.3 Web Main Menu

..................................................................................................................................................................... 372

6.4 Cluster Service

........................................................................................................................................................................ 374

6.4.1 Configuring Cluster IP

............................................................................................................................................. 374

6.4.2 Main Device

.................................................................................................................................................................. 374

6.4.3 Sub Device

..................................................................................................................................................................... 375

6.4.4 Transferring Videos

.................................................................................................................................................. 376

6.4.5 Configuring Cluster Control

................................................................................................................................. 376

6.4.5.1 Cluster Control

................................................................................................................................................. 376

6.4.5.2 Arbitrage IP

........................................................................................................................................................ 376

6.4.6 Cluster Log

.................................................................................................................................................................... 377

7 Glossary

................................................................................................................................................................................................ 378

8 FAQ

Appendix 1 HDD Capacity Calculation

..................................................................................................................................... 383

Appendix 2 Mouse Operation

....................................................................................................................................................... 384

Appendix 3 Remote Control

.......................................................................................................................................................... 385

Appendix 4 Compatible Network Camera List

..................................................................................................................... 388

Appendix 5 Cybersecurity Recommendations

..................................................................................................................... 394

User's Manual

1 Introduction

1.1 Overview

The NVR is a high performance network video recorder. This product supports local live view,

multiple-window display, recorded file local storage, remote control and mouse shortcut menu

operation, and remote management and control function.

This product supports center storage, front-end storage and client-end storage. The monitor zone in

the front-end can be set in anywhere. Working with other front-end devices such as IPC, NVS, this

series product can establish a strong surveillance network through the CMS. In the network system,

there is only one network cable from the monitor center to the monitor zone in the whole network.

There is no audio/video cable from the monitor center to the monitor zone. The whole project is

featured by simple connection, low-cost, low maintenance work.

This NVR can be widely used in areas such as public security, water conservancy, transportation and

education.

1.2 Features

AI Functions

AI functions are available on select models and vary with models.

●

Face detection. The system can detect the faces are on the video image.

●

Face recognition. The system can compare the detected faces with the images in the face

database in real time.

●

Human body detection. The system activates alarm actions once human body is detected.

●

People counting. The system can effectively count the number of people and flow direction.

●

Heat map. The system can monitor the active objects in a specific area.

●

Automatic number plate recognition (ANPR). The system can effectively monitor the passing

vehicles.

Smart Playback

This function is available on select models.

●

IVS playback. It can screen out and replay the records meeting the set rules.

●

Face detection playback. It can screen out and replay the records with human faces.

●

Face recognition playback. It can compare the face information in the video with the information

in the database and replay the corresponding records.

●

ANPR playback. It can screen out the record with a specific car plate number or all the records

with car plate numbers.

●

Human body detection playback. It can screen out and replay the records with specific human

bodies.

User's Manual

●

Smart search. It includes smart functions such as searching by attribute and searching by image

to enable users to get target records quickly.

Cloud Upgrade

For the NVR connected to the Internet, it supports application online upgrade.

Real-Time Surveillance

●

VGA, HDMI port. Connect to monitor to realize real-time surveillance. Some series support

TV/VGA/HDMI output at the same time.

●

Shortcut menu for preview.

●

Support multiple popular PTZ decoder control protocols. Support preset, tour and pattern.

Playback

●

Support independent real-time recording for each channel. At the same time it supports

functions such as smart search, forward play, network monitor, record search and download.

●

Support various playback modes: slow play, fast play, backward play and frame-by-frame play.

●

Support time title overlay so that you can view the event accurate occurred time.

●

Support specified zone enlargement.

User Management

Users can be added to user groups for management. Each group has a set of permissions that can be

individually edited.

Storage

●

With corresponding settings (such as alarm settings and schedule settings), you can back up

related audio/video data in the network video recorder.

●

You can take records via the web and the record files are saved on the PC in which the client

locates.

Alarm

●

Respond to external alarm simultaneously (within 200 ms). Based on user’s pre-defined relay

settings, the system can process the alarm input correctly and sends user screen or voice

prompts (supporting pre-recorded audio).

●

Support settings of the central alarm server, so that the system can automatically notify users of

the alarm information. Alarm input can be derived from various connected peripheral devices.

●

Alert you of alarm information via email.

Network Surveillance

●

Send audio/video data compressed by IPC or NVS to client-ends through the network, and then

the data will be decompressed and displayed.

●

Support max 128 connections at the same time.

●

Transmit audio/video data by protocols such as HTTP, TCP, UDP, MULTICAST and RTP/RTCP.

●

Transmit some alarm data or alarm info by SNMP.

●

Support web access in WAN/LAN.

User's Manual

Window Split

Adopt video compression and digital processing to display several windows in one monitor. Support

1/4/8/9/16/25/36 window split in preview and 1/4/9/16 window split in playback.

Record

Support regular record, motion record, alarm record and smart record. Save the recorded files in the

HDD, USB device, client-end PC or network storage server and you can search or playback the saved

files at the local-end or via the Web/USB devices.

Backup

Support network backup and USB record backup. You can back up the record files in devices such as

network storage server, peripheral USB 2.0 device and burner.

Network Management

●

Supervise NVR configuration and control power via Ethernet.

●

Support web management.

Peripheral Equipment Management

●

Support peripheral device control and you can freely set the control protocol and connection

port.

●

Support transparent data transmission such as RS-232 and RS-485.

Auxiliary

●

Support switch between NTSC and PAL.

●

Support real-time display of system resources information and running status.

●

Support log record.

●

Local GUI output. Shortcut menu operation with the mouse.

●

IR control function (for some series only). Shortcut menu operation with remote control.

●

Support to play the video/audio files from remote IPC or NVS.

User's Manual

2 Front Panel and Rear Panel

The following front panel and rear panel figures are for reference only.

2.1 Front Panel

2.1.1 NVR41-4KS2/NVR41-P-4KS2/NVR41-8P-4KS2/NVR41-

4KS2/L/NVR41-P-4KS2/L/NVR41-8P-4KS2/L/NVR21-4KS2/NVR21-P-

4KS2/NVR21-8P-4KS2/NVR21-S3/NVR21-P-S3/NVR21-8P-S3 Series

The figure is for reference only.

The NVR41-4KS2/NVR41-4KS2/L/NVR41-P-4KS2/NVR41-P-4KS2/L/NVR21-4KS2/NVR21-P-

4KS2/NVR21-S3/NVR21-P-S3 front panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-1 Front panel

The NVR41-8P-4KS2/NVR41-8P-4KS2/L/NVR21-8P-4KS2/NVR21-8P-S3 front panel is shown as below.

User's Manual

Figure 2-2 Front panel

Table 2-1 Icons

No. Name Function

1 HDD status indicator light

The red light becomes on when HDD is

abnormal.

2 Power indicator light

The red light becomes on when the power

connection is normal.

3 Network status indicator light

The red light becomes on when the network

connection is abnormal.

2.1.2 NVR11HS-S3H/NVR11HS-P-S3H/NVR11HS-8P-S3H/NVR41HS-

4KS2/NVR41HS-P-4KS2/NVR41HS-8P-4KS2/NVR41HS-

4KS2/L/NVR41HS-P-4KS2/L/NVR41HS-8P-4KS2/L/NVR21HS-

4KS2/NVR21HS-P-4KS2/NVR21HS-8P-4KS2/NVR21HS-S3/NVR21HS-

P-S3/NVR21HS-8P-S3

The figure is for reference only.

Figure 2-3 Front panel

User's Manual

Table 2-2 Icons

Icon Name Function

HDD HDD status indicator light

The blue light is on when the HDD is

malfunction.

NET

Network status indicator

light

The blue light is on when the network

connection is abnormal.

POWER Power status indicator light

The blue light is on when the power

connection is OK.

USB port

Connect to peripheral USB storage device,

mouse and more.

2.1.3 NVR52-4KS2/NVR52-8P-4KS2/NVR52-16P-4KS2/NVR42-

4KS2/NVR42-P-4KS2/NVR42-8P-4KS2/NVR42-16P-4KS2/NVR42-

4KS2/L/NVR42-P-4KS2/L/NVR42-8P-4KS2/L/NVR42-16P-

4KS2/L/NVR5224-24P-4KS2/NVR54-4KS2/NVR54-16P-4KS2/NVR44-

4KS2/NVR44-16P-4KS2/NVR44-4KS2/L/NVR44-16P-

4KS2/L/NVR5424-24P-4KS2/NVR58-4KS2/NVR58-16P-4KS2/NVR48-

4KS2/NVR48-16P-4KS2/NVR48-4KS2/L/NVR48-16P-4KS2/L/NVR22-

4KS2/NVR22-P-4KS2/NVR22-8P-4KS2/NVR52-8P-4KS2E/NVR52-

16P-4KS2E/NVR54-16P-4KS2E/NVR58-16P-4KS2E

The figures are for reference only.

The NVR52-4KS2/NVR52-8P-4KS2/NVR52-16P-4KS2/NVR42-4KS2/NVR42-P-4KS2/NVR42-8P-

4KS2/NVR42-16P-4KS2/NVR42-4KS2/L/NVR42-P-4KS2/L/NVR42-8P-4KS2/L/NVR42-16P-

4KS2/LNVR5224-24P-4KS2/NVR22-4KS2/NVR22-P-4KS2/NVR22-8P-4KS2/NVR52-8P-4KS2E/NVR52-

16P-4KS2E series front panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-4 Front panel

The NVR54-4KS2/NVR54-16P-4KS2/NVR44-4KS2/NVR44-16P-4KS2/NVR44-4KS2/L/NVR44-16P-

4KS2/L/NVR54-24P-4KS2/NVR54-16P-4KS2E series front panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-5 Front panel

User's Manual

The NVR58-4KS2/NVR58-16P-4KS2/NVR48-4KS2/NVR48-16P-4KS2/NVR48-4KS2/L/NVR48-16P-

4KS2/L/NVR58-16P-4KS2E series front panel is shown as below

Figure 2-6 Front panel

Table 2-3 Icons

Icon Name Function

STATUS Status indicator light

The blue light is on when the

Device is working properly.

HDD HDD status indicator light

The blue light is on when the HDD

malfunctions.

NET Network status indicator light

The blue light is on when the

network connection is abnormal.

POWER Power status indicator light

The blue light is on when the

power connection is normal.

USB 2.0 port

Connect to peripheral USB 2.0

storage device, mouse, burner

and more.

2.1.4 NVR21-W-4KS2 Series

The front panel is shown as below.

The figure is for reference only.

User's Manual

Figure 2-7 Front panel

Table 2-4 Icons

Icon Name Function

HDD HDD status indicator light

The blue light is on when the HDD

malfunctions.

NET Network status indicator light

The blue light is on when the network

connection is abnormal.

PWR Power status indicator light

The blue light is on when the power

connection is normal.

2.1.5 NVR21HS-W-4KS2/NVR11HS-W-S2-CE/NVR11HS-W-S2-FCC

Series

The front panel is shown as below.

The figure is for reference only.

User's Manual

Figure 2-8 Front panel

Table 2-5 Icons

Icon Name Function

HDD HDD status indicator light

The blue light is on when the HDD is

malfunction.

NET Network status indicator light

The blue light is on when the network

connection is abnormal.

POWER Power status indicator light

The blue light is on when the power

connection is normal.

USB 2.0 port

Connect to peripheral USB storage

device, mouse and more.

2.1.6 NVR21-I/NVR21-I2/NVR21-P-I/NVR21-P-I2/NVR21-8P-I/NVR21-

8P-I2 Series

The figure is for reference only.

The NVR21-I/NVR21-I2 front panel is shown as below.

User's Manual

Figure 2-9 Front panel

The NVR21-P-I/NVR21-P-I2 front panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-10 Front panel

The NVR21-8P-I/NVR21-8P-I2 front panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-11 Front panel

2.1.7 NVR22-I/NVR22-I2/NVR22-P-I/NVR22-P-I2/NVR22-8P-I/NVR22-

8P-I2/NVR22-16P-I/NVR22-16P-I2 Series

The figure is for reference only.

The NVR22-I/NVR22-I2 front panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-12 Front panel

The NVR22-P-I/NVR22-P-I2 front panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-13 Front panel

The NVR22-8P-I/NVR22-8P-I2 front panel is shown as below.

User's Manual

Figure 2-14 Front panel

The NVR22-16P-I/NVR22-16P-I2 front panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-15 Front panel

Table 2-6 Icons

Icon Name Function

HDD

HDD status indicator

light

The blue light is on when the HDD

malfunctions.

NET Network status indicator light

The blue light is on when the

network connection is abnormal.

PWR Power status indicator light

The blue light is on when the power

connection is OK.

USB 2.0 port

Connect to peripheral USB 2.0

storage device, mouse, burner and

more.

2.1.8 NVR21HS-I/NVR21HS-I2/NVR21HS-P-I/NVR21HS-P-

I2/NVR21HS-8P-I/NVR21HS-8P-I2/NVR44-4KS2/I/NVR44-16P-4KS2/I

Series

The figure is for reference only.

The front panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-16 Front panel

Table 2-7 Icons

Icon Name Function

HDD

HDD status indicator

light

The blue light is on when the HDD

malfunctions.

User's Manual

Icon Name Function

NET Network status indicator light

The blue light is on when the

network connection is abnormal.

PWR Power status indicator light

The blue light is on when the power

connection is OK.

USB 2.0 port

Connect to peripheral USB 2.0

storage device, mouse, burner and

more.

2.1.9 NVR48-I/NVR58-I/NVR58-I/L Series

The section takes NVR4832-I/NVR5864-I/NVR5864-I/L/NVR5832-I/NVR5832-I/L series as examples.

The figure is for reference only.

Figure 2-17 Front panel

Table 2-8 Icons

No. Port Name Function

1 USB port

Connects to the external devices such as keyboard,

mouse, and USB storage device.

2 IR indicator Receives signals from the remote control.

2.1.10 NVR42-I/NVR44-I/NVR54-I/NVR54-I/L/NVR52-I/NVR52-I/L

Series

The section uses NVR4208-8P-I/NVR4216-I/NVR4216-16P-I/NVR4416-16P-I/NVR4432-I/NVR5432-16P-

I/NVR5432-16P-I/L/ NVR5216-16P-I/NVR5216-16P-I/L/NVR5216-8P-I/NVR5216-8P-I/L series as

examples.

The figure is for reference only.

Figure 2-18 Front panel

User's Manual

Table 2-9 Icons

No. Port Name Function

1 USB port

Connects to the external devices such as keyboard,

mouse, and USB storage device.

2 IR indicator Receives signals from the remote control.

2.1.11 NVR48-4KS2/I/NVR48-16P-4KS2/I Series

The figures are for reference only.

The NVR48-4KS2/I/NVR48-16P-4KS2/I series front panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-19 Front panel

Table 2-10 Icons

Icon Name Function

HDD HDD status indicator light

The blue light is on when the HDD

malfunctions.

NET Network status indicator light

The blue light is on when the

network connection is abnormal.

PWR Power status indicator light

The blue light is on when the power

connection is normal.

USB 2.0 port

Connect to peripheral USB 2.0

storage device, mouse, burner and

more.

2.1.12 NVR608-32-4KS2 Series

The following figures are for reference only.

The NVR608-32-4KS2 front panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-20 Front panel

User's Manual

Table 2-11 Icons description

Icon Name Function

STATUS Status indicator light

The blue light is on when the device

is working properly.

HDD HDD status indicator light

The blue light is on when the HDD

malfunctions.

NET Network status indicator light

The blue light is on when the

network connection is abnormal.

POWER Power status indicator light

The blue light is on when the power

connection is normal.

USB 2.0 port

Connect to peripheral USB 2.0

storage device, mouse, burner and

more.

2.1.13 NVR608-64-4KS2/NVR608-128-4KS2/NVR608H-

XI/NVR608RH-XI Series

The NVR608-64-4KS2/NVR608-128-4KS2/NVR608H-32-XI/NVR608H-64-XI/NVR608H-128-

XI/NVR608RH-32-XI/NVR608RH-64-XI/NVR608RH-128-XI front panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-21 Front panel

Table 2-12 Front panel description

Icon Name

ALARM Alarm indicator light

HDD HDD status indicator light

NET Network status indicator light

POWER Power status indicator light

USB 2.0 port

Power on-off button

2.1.14 NVR616-4KS2 Series

The following figures are for reference only.

For the product of LCD, the front panel of NVR616-4KS2 is shown as below.

User's Manual

Figure 2-22 Front panel

Table 2-13 Icons

No. Name Function

1 Power button

Press it once to turn on the device.

Press it for a long time to turn off the device.

We do not recommend you turn off the Device in

this way.

Press power button for a long time or pull out the

power cable might result in device auto restart.

System HDD Indicator

light

The blue light becomes on after system booted up

properly.

In the system HDD, there are device important

configuration file, factory default configuration file,

and device initial boot up data.

3 Alarm indicator light

The alarm indicator light becomes on once an alarm

occurred. It becomes on via the software detection.

The indicator light becomes on when there is a local

alarm.

4 Network indicator light

The blue network indicator light is on after you

connected the device to the network.

5 USB port —

6 Front panel lock —

For general NVR616-4KS2 series, the front panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-23 Front panel

User's Manual

Table 2-14 Icons

No. Name Function

1 Power button

Press it once to turn on the device.

Press it for a long time to turn off the device.

We do not recommend you turn off the Device in this

way.

Press power button for a long time or pull out the power

cable might result in device auto restart.

System HDD

Indicator light

The blue light becomes on after system booted up

properly.

In the system HDD, there are device important

configuration file, factory default configuration file,

device initial boot up data.

Alarm indicator

light

The alarm indicator light becomes on once an alarm

occurred. It becomes on via the software detection. The

indicator light becomes on when there is a local alarm.

Network indicator

light

The blue network indicator light is on after you

connected the device to the network.

5 USB port —

6 16 HDD slot —

After you remove the front panel, you can see there are 16 HDDs. From the left to the right and from

the top to the bottom, it ranges from 1~4, 5~8, 9~12, 13~16.

You can see there are two indicator lights on the HDD bracket.

●

The power indicator light is at the top. The light is yellow after you connected the device to the

power.

●

The read-write indicator light is at the bottom. The blue light flashes when system is reading or

writing the data.

Figure 2-24 Front panel

2.2 Rear Panel

2.2.1 NVR21-4KS2/NVR21-P-4KS2/NVR21-8P-4KS2 Series

The NVR21-4KS2 is shown as below.

User's Manual

Figure 2-25 Rear panel

The NVR21-P-4KS2 is shown as below.

Figure 2-26 Rear panel

The NVR21-8P-4KS2 is shown as below.

Figure 2-27 Rear panel

Table 2-15 Ports

Port Name Connection Function

/ Power input port

Power socket.

●

For NVR21-S2/21-4KS2, input 12 VDC/2 A.

●

For NVR21-P-S2/21-P-4KS2, input 48 VDC/1.25

●

For NVR21-8P-S2/21-8P-4KS2, input 48 VDC/2

Network port

10/100 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect

to the network cable.

USB port

USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device

and more.

HDMI

High Definition

Media Interface

High definition audio and video signal output

port. It transmits uncompressed high definition

video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port

of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.

VGA

VGA video output

port

VGA video output port. Output analog video

signal. It can connect to the monitor to view

analog video.

User's Manual

Port Name Connection Function

MIC IN Audio input port

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the

analog audio signal output from the devices such

as microphone, pickup.

MIC OUT Audio output port

Audio output port. It is to output the analog

audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

GND Ground end.

PoE PORTS PoE port

Built-in switch. Support PoE function.

For PoE series product, you can use this port to

provide power to the network camera.

2.2.2 NVR11HS-S3H/NVR11HS-P-S3H/NVR11HS-8P-S3H/NVR21HS-

4KS2/NVR21HS-P-4KS2/NVR21HS-8P-4KS2/NVR41HS-

4KS2/NVR41HS-P-4KS2/NVR41HS-8P-4KS2/NVR41HS-

4KS2/L/NVR41HS-P-4KS2/L/NVR41HS-8P-4KS2/L/NVR21HS-

S3/NVR21HS-P-S3/NVR21HS-8P-S3

The NVR11HS-S3H/NVR21HS-4KS2/NVR41HS-4KS2/NVR41HS-4KS2/L/NVR21HS-S3 series rear panel is

shown as below.

Figure 2-28 Rear panel

The NVR11HS-P-S3H/NVR21HS-P-4KS2/NVR41HS-P-4KS2/NVR41HS-P-4KS2/L/NVR21HS-P-S3 series

rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-29 Rear panel

The NVR11HS-8P-S3H/NVR21HS-8P-4KS2/NVR41HS-8P-4KS2/NVR41HS-8P-4KS2/L/NVR21HS-8P-S3

series rear panel is shown as below.

User's Manual

Figure 2-30 Rear panel

Table 2-16 Ports

Port Name Connection Function

/ Power input port

Power socket.

●

For NVR11HS-P-S3H/NVR21HS-4KS2/NVR41HS-

4KS2 series, input 12 VDC/2 A.

●

For NVR11HS-P-S3H/NVR21HS-P-4KS2/NVR41HS-

4KS2 series, input 48 VDC/1.25 A.

●

For NVR11HS-8P-4KS2/NVR21HS-8P-

4KS2/NVR41HS-4KS2 series, input 48 VDC/2 A.

Network port

10/100 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to

the network cable.

USB port

USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device and

more.

HDMI

High Definition

Media Interface

High definition audio and video signal output port. It

transmits uncompressed high definition video and

multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display

device. HDMI version is 1.4.

VGA

VGA video output

port

VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It

can connect to the monitor to view analog video.

MIC IN Audio input port

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog

audio signal output from the devices such as

microphone, pickup.

MIC OUT Audio output port

Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio

signal to the devices such as the sound box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

GND Ground end.

PoE PORTS PoE port

Built-in switch. Support PoE function.

For PoE series product, you can use this port to provide

power to the network camera.

2.2.3 NVR22-4KS2/NVR22-P-4KS2/NVR22-8P-4KS2 Series

The NVR22-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below.

User's Manual

Figure 2-31 Rear panel

The NVR22-P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-32 Rear panel

The NVR22-8P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-33 Rear panel

Table 2-17 Rear panel description

Port Name Connection Function

/ Power input port

Power socket.

●

For NVR22-4KS2general series, input 12 VDC/4

●

For NVR22-P-4KS2 series, input 48 VDC/1.5 A.

●

For NVR22-8P-4KS2 series, input 53 VDC 120 W.

Network port

10/100 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect

to the network cable.

USB port

USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device

and more.

HDMI

High Definition

Media Interface

High definition audio and video signal output port.

It transmits uncompressed high definition video

and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the

display device. HDMI version is 1.4.

VGA

VGA video output

port

VGA video output port. Output analog video signal.

It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.

MIC IN Audio input port

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the

analog audio signal output from the devices such as

microphone, pickup.

MIC OUT Audio output port

Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio

signal to the devices such as the sound box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

GND Ground end.

User's Manual

Port Name Connection Function

PoE PORTS PoE port

Built-in switch. Support PoE function.

For PoE series product, you can use this port to

provide power to the network camera.

2.2.4 NVR52-4KS2/NVR52-8P-4KS2/NVR52-16P-4KS2/NVR52-24P-

4KS2/NVR52-8P-4KS2E/NVR52-16P-4KS2E Series

The NVR52-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-34 Rear panel

The NVR52-8P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-35 Rear panel

The NVR52-16P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-36 Rear panel

The NVR52-24P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-37 Rear panel

The NVR52-8P-4KS2E/52-16P-4KS2E series rear panel is shown as below.

The following figure takes NVR52-16P-4KS2E series as an example. NVR52-8P-4KS2E has 8 ePoE ports

only.

Figure 2-38 Rear panel

User's Manual

Table 2-18 Ports

Icon Port Name Function

Network port

10/100/1000 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port.

Connect to the network cable.

HDMI

High Definition

Media Interface

High definition audio and video signal output port. It

transmits uncompressed high definition video and

multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the

display device. HDMI version is 1.4.

USB 3.0 port

USB 3.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device,

USB burner and more.

RS-232

RS-232 debug

COM

It is for general COM debug to configure IP address

or transfer transparent COM data.

VGA

VGA video output

port

VGA video output port. Output analog video signal.

It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.

MIC IN Audio input port

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the

analog audio signal output from the devices such as

microphone, pickup.

MIC OUT Audio output port

Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio

signal to the devices such as the sound box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

1–8

Alarm input port

1–8

●

There are two groups. The first group is from

port 1 to port 4; the second group is from port 5

to port 8. They are to receive the signal from the

external alarm source. There are two types; NO

(normal open)/NC (normal close).

●

When your alarm input device is using external

power, please make sure the device and the NVR

have the same ground.

GND Alarm input ground port.

NO1–NO3

Alarm output port

1–3

●

3 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1: port

NO1–C1; Group 2: port NO2–C2; Group 3: port

NO3–C3). Output alarm signal to the alarm

device. Please make sure there is power to the

external alarm device.

●

NO: Normal open alarm output port.

●

C: Alarm output public end.

C1–C3

RS-485

communication

port

RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to

the control devices such as speed dome PTZ.

RS485_B. It is the cable B. You can connect to the

control devices such as speed dome PTZ.

Power input port Input 12 VDC/4 A.

Power switch — Power on/off button.

User's Manual

Icon Port Name Function

PoE PORTS —

Built-in Switch. Support PoE or ePoE function.

●

For ePoE series product, port 1 to port 8 are the

ePoE ports. ePoE port supports 300

meters@100Mbps, 800 meters@10Mbps. Port 9

to port 16 are general PoE ports.

●

The 8 PoE series product supports total 130 W.

●

The 16 PoE series product supports total 130 W.

2.2.5 NVR54-4KS2/NVR58-4KS2/NVR54-16P-4KS2/NVR58-16P-

4KS2/NVR54-24P-4KS2/NVR58-16P-4KS2E Series

The NVR54-4KS2/NVR58-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-39 Rear panel

The NVR54-16P-4KS2/NVR58-16P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-40 Rear panel

The NVR54-24P-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-41 Rear panel

The NVR54-16P-4KS2E series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-42 Rear panel

The NVR58-16P-4KS2E series rear panel is shown as below.

User's Manual

Figure 2-43 Rear panel

Table 2-19 Rear panel description

Name Function

Power switch Power on-off button

Power input port Input 100–240 VAC.

Network port

10/100/1000 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect

to the network cable.

eSATA eSATA port

External SATA port. It can connect to the device of the

SATA port. Please jump the HDD when there is peripheral

connected HDD.

USB port

USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB

burner and more.

HDMI

High Definition

Media Interface

High definition audio and video signal output port. It

transmits uncompressed high definition video and

multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display

device. HDMI version is 1.4b.

MIC IN Audio input port

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog

audio signal output from the devices such as microphone,

pickup.

MIC OUT Audio output port

Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal

to the devices such as the sound box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

1–16

Alarm input port

1–16

●

There are four groups. The first group is from port 1 to

port 4, the second group is from port 5 to port 8, the

third group is from 9 to 12, and the fourth group is

from 13 to 16. They are to receive the signal from the

external alarm source. There are two types; NO

(normal open)/NC (normal close).

●

When your alarm input device is using external

power, please make sure the device and the NVR have

the same ground.

User's Manual

Name Function

Ground Alarm input ground end.

NO1–NO5

Alarm output port

1–5

●

5 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1: port NO1–

C1, Group 2:port NO2–C2, Group 3: port NO3–C3,

Group 4: port NO4–C4, Group 5: port NO5, C5, NC5).

Output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make

sure there is power to the external alarm device.

●

NO: Normal open alarm output port.

●

C: Alarm output public end.

●

NC: Normal close alarm output port.

C1–C5

NC5

RS-485

communication

port

RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the

control devices such as speed dome PTZ.

RS485_B. It is the cable B. You can connect to the control

devices such as speed dome PTZ.

CTRL (CTRL 12

—

Controller 12 V power output. It is to

control the on-off alarm relay output. It

can be used to control the device alarm

output. At the same time, it can also be

used as the power input source of some

devices such as the alarm detector.

The two ports

serve as

another

group of

alarm output

ports.

P (+12 V) —

+12 V power output port. It can provide

the power to some peripheral devices

such as the camera or the alarm device.

Please note the supplying power shall

be below 1 A.

RS-232

RS-232 debug

COM

It is for general COM debug to configure IP address or

transfer transparent COM data.

VGA

VGA video output

port

VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can

connect to the monitor to view analog video.

PoE PORTS —

Built-in Switch. Support PoE or ePoE function.

For ePoE series product, port 1 to port 8 are the ePoE

ports. ePoE port supports 300 meters@100Mbps, 800

meters@10Mbps. Port 9 to port 16 are general PoE ports.

The 16 PoE series supports total 150W.

2.2.6 NVR41-4KS2/NVR41-P-4KS2/NVR41-8P-4KS2/NVR41-

4KS2/L/NVR41-P-4KS2/L/NVR41-8P-4KS2/L/NVR21-S3/NVR21-P-

S3/NVR21-8P-S3

The NVR41-4KS2/NVR41-4KS2/L/NVR21-S3 series rear panel is shown as below.

User's Manual

Figure 2-44 Rear panel

The NVR41-P-4KS2/NVR41-P-4KS2/L series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-45 Rear panel

The NVR41-8P-4KS2/NVR41-8P-4KS2/L series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-46

Table 2-20 Ports

Port Name Connection Function

USB port

USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage

device, USB burner and more.

Network port

10/100 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port.

Connect to the network cable.

HDMI

High Definition

Media Interface

High definition audio and video signal output

port. It transmits uncompressed high definition

video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI

port of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.

VGA

VGA video output

port

VGA video output port. Output analog video

signal. It can connect to the monitor to view

analog video.

GND Ground end.

/ Power input port

Power socket.

●

For NVR41-4KS2: 12 VDC/2 A power.

●

For NVR41-P-4KS2: 48 VDC/72 W power.

●

For NVR41-8P-4KS2: 48 VDC/96 W power.

User's Manual

Port Name Connection Function

MIC IN Audio input port

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the

analog audio signal output from the devices

such as microphone, pickup.

MIC OUT Audio output port

Audio output port. It is to output the analog

audio signal to the devices such as the sound

box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

PoE PORTS PoE port

Built-in switch. Support PoE function.

For PoE series product, you can use this port to

provide power to the network camera.

2.2.7 NVR42-4KS2/NVR42-P-4KS2/NVR42-8P-4KS2/NVR42-16P-

4KS2/NVR42-4KS2/L/NVR42-P-4KS2/L/NVR42-8P-4KS2/L/NVR42-

16P-4KS2/L Series

The NVR42-4KS2/NVR42-4KS2/L series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-47 Rear panel

The NVR42-P-4KS2/NVR42-P-4KS2/L series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-48 Rear panel

The NVR42-8P-4KS2/NVR42-8P-4KS2/L series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-49 Rear panel

The NVR42-16P-4KS2/NVR42-16P-4KS2/L series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-50 Rear panel

User's Manual

Table 2-21 Rear panel description

Name Function

Power switch Power on/off button.

Power input port

Input 12 VDC/4 A.

For NVR42-4KS2 series product only.

Switch power port. Input 48 VDC/96 W.

For NVR42-P-4KS2 series product only.

Input 90~264-12 VAC 5 A/52 V 2.5 A-190 W.

For NVR42-8P-4KS2/NVR42-16P-4KS24K 1U (S2)

with 8 PoE ports/ 4K 1U (S2) with 16 PoE ports

series product only.

MIC IN Audio input port

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the

analog audio signal output from the devices such

as microphone, pickup.

MIC OUT Audio output port

Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio

signal to the devices such as the sound box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

1–4

Alarm input port 1–

●

There are two types; NO (normal open)/NC

(normal close).

●

When your alarm input device is using external

power, please make sure the device and the

NVR have the same ground.

GND Alarm input ground port.

N1, N2

Alarm output port

1–2

●

2 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1: port

NO1–C1,Group 2: port NO2–C2).Output alarm

signal to the alarm device. Please make sure

there is power to the external alarm device.

●

NO: Normal open alarm output port.

●

C:Alarm output public end.

C1, C2

RS-485

communication

port

RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to

the control devices such as speed dome PTZ.

RS485_B. It is the cable B. You can connect to the

control devices such as speed dome PTZ.

Network port

10/100/1000 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port.

Connect to the network cable.

USB port

USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device,

USB burner and more.

RS-232 RS-232 debug COM

It is for general COM debug to configure IP address

or transfer transparent COM data.

User's Manual

Name Function

HDMI

High Definition

Media Interface

High definition audio and video signal output port.

It transmits uncompressed high definition video

and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the

display device. HDMI version is 1.4.

VGA

VGA video output

port

VGA video output port. Output analog video signal.

It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.

PoE PORTS /

Built-in Switch. Support PoE.

For PoE series product, you can use this port to

provide power to the network camera.

2.2.8 NVR44-4KS2/NVR44-16P-4KS2/NVR44-4KS2/L/NVR44-16P-

4KS2/L/NVR44-4KS2/I/NVR44-16P-4KS2/I Series

The NVR44-4KS2/NVR44-4KS2/L/NVR44-4KS2/I series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-51 Rear panel

The NVR44-16P-4KS2/NVR44-16P-4KS2/L/NVR44-16P-4KS2/I series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-52 Rear panel

Table 2-22 Ports

Name Function

Power switch — Power on-off button

Power input

port

— 90~264-12 VAC 12.5 A/-53 V 2.83 A

MIC IN Audio input port

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio

signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup.

MIC OUT

Audio output

port

Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to

the devices such as the sound box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

VIDEO OUT

Video output

port

CVBS output

User's Manual

Name Function

1–16

Alarm input port

1–16

●

There are four groups. The first group is from port 1 to

port 4, the second group is from port 5 to port 8, the

third group is from 9 to 12, and the fourth group is from

13 to 16. They are to receive the signal from the

external alarm source. There are two types; NO (normal

open)/NC (normal close).

●

When your alarm input device is using external power,

please make sure the device and the NVR have the

same ground.

Video output

port

CVBS output

NO1–NO3

Alarm output

port 1–3

●

3 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1: port NO1–C1;

Group 2: port NO2–C2; Group 3: port NO3–C3). Output

alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure

there is power to the external alarm device.

●

NO: Normal open alarm output port.

●

C: Alarm output public end.

C1–C3

RS-485

communication

port

RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the

control devices such as speed dome PTZ.

RS485_B. It is the cable B. You can connect to the control

devices such as speed dome PTZ.

CTRL (CTRL

12 V)

—

Controller 12 V power output. It is to

control the on-off alarm relay output. It

can be used to control the device alarm

output. At the same time, it can also be

used as the power input source of some

devices such as the alarm detector.

The two

ports serve

as another

group of

alarm output

ports.

P (+12 V) —

+12 V power output port. It can provide

the power to some peripheral devices

such as the camera or the alarm device.

Please note the supplying power shall be

below 1 A.

Network port

10/100/1000 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to

the network cable.

eSATA eSATA port

External SATA port. It can connect to the device of the SATA

port. Please jump the HDD when there is peripheral

connected HDD.

USB 2.0 port

USB 2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB

burner and more.

RS-232

RS-232 debug

COM

It is for general COM debug to configure IP address or

transfer transparent COM data.

HDMI

High Definition

Media Interface

High definition audio and video signal output port. It

transmits uncompressed high definition video and

multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display

device. HDMI version is 1.3.

User's Manual

Name Function

VGA

VGA video

output port

VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can

connect to the monitor to view analog video.

PoE PORTS PoE port

Built-in Switch. Support PoE.

For PoE series product, you can use this port to provide

power to the network camera.

2.2.9 NVR48-4KS2/NVR48-16P-4KS2/NVR48-4KS2/L/NVR48-16P-

4KS2/L/NVR48-4KS2/I/NVR48-16P-4KS2/I Series

The NVR48-4KS2/NVR48-4KS2/L/NVR48-4KS2/I series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-53 Rear panel

The NVR48-16P-4KS2/NVR48-16P-4KS2/L/NVR48-16P-4KS2/I series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-54 Rear panel

Table 2-23 Ports

Name Function

Power switch — Power on-off button.

Power input

port

— 90~264-12 VAC 12.5 A/-53 V 2.83 A.

MIC IN

Audio input

port

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog audio

signal output from the devices such as microphone, pickup.

MIC OUT

Audio output

port

Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal to

the devices such as the sound box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

VIEDEO OUT

Video output

port

CVBS output.

User's Manual

Name Function

1–16

Alarm input

port 1–16

●

There are four groups. The first group is from port 1 to

port 4, the second group is from port 5 to port 8, the

third group is from 9 to 12, and the fourth group is from

13 to 16. They are to receive the signal from the external

alarm source. There are two types; NO (normal

open)/NC (normal close).

●

When your alarm input device is using external power,

please make sure the device and the NVR have the

same ground.

GND Alarm input ground port.

NO1–NO3

Alarm output

port 1–3

●

3 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1: port NO1–C1;

Group 2: port NO2–C2; Group 3: port NO3–C3). Output

alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure there

is power to the external alarm device.

●

NO: Normal open alarm output port.

●

C: Alarm output public end.

C1–C3

RS-485

communication

port

RS485_A port. It is the cable A. You can connect to the

control devices such as speed dome PTZ.

RS485_B. It is the cable B. You can connect to the control

devices such as speed dome PTZ.

CTRL (CTRL 12

—

Controller 12 V power output. It is to

control the on-off alarm relay output. It

can be used to control the device alarm

output. At the same time, it can also be

used as the power input source of some

devices such as the alarm detector.

The two ports

serve as

another

group of

alarm output

ports.

P (+12 V) —

+12 V power output port. It can provide

the power to some peripheral devices

such as the camera or the alarm device.

Please note the supplying power shall be

below 1 A.

Network port

One 10/100/1000 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port.

Connect to the network cable.

eSATA eSATA port

External SATA port. It can connect to the device of the SATA

port. Please jump the HDD when there is peripheral

connected HDD.

USB port

USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device, USB

burner and more.

RS-232

RS-232 debug

COM

It is for general COM debug to configure IP address or

transfer transparent COM data.

HDMI

High Definition

Media Interface

High definition audio and video signal output port. It

transmits uncompressed high definition video and

multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display

device. HDMI version is 1.4.

User's Manual

Name Function

VGA

VGA video

output port

VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can

connect to the monitor to view analog video.

PoE PORTS PoE port

Built-in Switch. Support PoE.

For PoE series product, you can use this port to provide

power to the network camera.

2.2.10 NVR21-W-4KS2 Series

Figure 2-55 Rear panel

Table 2-24 Ports

Port Name Connection Function

USB 2.0 port

USB 2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage

device, USB burner and more.

Network port

10/100 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port.

Connect to the network cable.

HDMI

High Definition Media

Interface

High definition audio and video signal

output port. It transmits uncompressed high

definition video and multiple-channel data

to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI

version is 1.4.

User's Manual

Port Name Connection Function

VGA VGA video output port

VGA video output port. Output analog video

signal. It can connect to the monitor to view

analog video.

Power input port Input 12 VDC/2 A.

WPS/RESET Reset/WPS function

Device Wi-Fi reset and WPS function button:

●

Hold down this button for 5 seconds and

above to restore Wi-Fi AP to defaults.

●

Press this button for less than 2 seconds,

and then press the WPS button of Wi-Fi

IPC, the device and Wi-Fi IPC can be

connected.

2.2.11 NVR21HS-W-4KS2Series

Figure 2-56 Rear panel

Table 2-25 Ports

Icon Name Function

Power input socket Power socket. Input 12 VDC/2 A.

Network port

10/100 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect

to the network cable.

USB 2.0 port

USB 2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage

device, and more.

User's Manual

Icon Name Function

HDMI

High Definition

Media Interface

High definition audio and video signal output port.

It transmits uncompressed high definition video

and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the

display device. HDMI version is 1.4.

VGA

VGA video output

port

VGA video output port. Output analog video signal.

It can connect to the monitor to view analog video.

GND Ground end.

WPS/RESET Reset/WPS function

Device Wi-Fi reset and WPS function button:

●

Hold down this button for 5 seconds and above

to restore Wi-Fi AP to defaults.

●

Press this button for less than 2 seconds, and

then press the WPS button of Wi-Fi IPC, the

device and Wi-Fi IPC can be connected.

2.2.12 NVR21-I/NVR21-I2 Series

The figure is for reference only.

Figure 2-57 Rear panel

Table 2-26 Ports

Port Name Connection Function

USB port

USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device

and more.

HDMI

High Definition

Media Interface

High definition audio and video signal output

port. It transmits uncompressed high definition

video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port

of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.

MIC IN Audio input port

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the

analog audio signal output from the devices such

as microphone, pickup.

MIC OUT Audio output port

Audio output port. It is to output the analog

audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

User's Manual

Port Name Connection Function

VGA

VGA video output

port

VGA video output port. Output analog video

signal. It can connect to the monitor to view

analog video.

Network port

10/100 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect

to the network cable.

Power input port Power socket.

GND Ground end.

2.2.13 NVR22-I/NVR22-I2 Series

The rear panel is shown as below.

The figure is for reference only.

Figure 2-58 Rear panel

Table 2-27 Ports

Port Name Connection Function

GND Ground end.

USB port

USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device

and more.

HDMI

High Definition

Media Interface

High definition audio and video signal output

port. It transmits uncompressed high definition

video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port

of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.

MIC IN Audio input port

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the

analog audio signal output from the devices such

as microphone, pickup.

MIC OUT Audio output port

Audio output port. It is to output the analog

audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

VGA

VGA video output

port

VGA video output port. Output analog video

signal. It can connect to the monitor to view

analog video.

Network port

10/100 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect

to the network cable.

Power input port Power socket.

User's Manual

Port Name Connection Function

Power switch Power on/off button.

2.2.14 NVR21-P-I/NVR21-P-I2 Series

The figure is for reference only.

Figure 2-59 Rear panel

Table 2-28 Ports

Port Name Connection Function

USB port

USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device

and more.

HDMI

High Definition

Media Interface

High definition audio and video signal output

port. It transmits uncompressed high definition

video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port

of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.

MIC IN Audio input port

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the

analog audio signal output from the devices such

as microphone, pickup.

MIC OUT Audio output port

Audio output port. It is to output the analog

audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

VGA

VGA video output

port

VGA video output port. Output analog video

signal. It can connect to the monitor to view

analog video.

Network port

10/100 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect

to the network cable.

PoE PORTS PoE port

Built-in switch. Support PoE function.

For PoE series product, you can use this port to

provide power to the network camera.

Power input port Power socket.

GND Ground end.

User's Manual

2.2.15 NVR22-P-I/NVR22-P-I2 Series

The rear panel is shown as below.

The figure is for reference only.

Figure 2-60 Rear panel

Table 2-29 Ports

Port Name Connection Function

GND Ground end.

USB port

USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device

and more.

HDMI

High Definition

Media Interface

High definition audio and video signal output

port. It transmits uncompressed high definition

video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port

of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.

MIC IN Audio input port

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the

analog audio signal output from the devices such

as microphone, pickup.

MIC OUT Audio output port

Audio output port. It is to output the analog

audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

VGA

VGA video output

port

VGA video output port. Output analog video

signal. It can connect to the monitor to view

analog video.

Network port

10/100 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect

to the network cable.

PoE PORTS PoE port

Built-in switch. Support PoE function.

For PoE series product, you can use this port to

provide power to the network camera.

Power input port Power socket.

Power switch Power on/off button.

User's Manual

2.2.16 NVR21-8P-I/NVR21-8P-I2 Series

The figure is for reference only.

Figure 2-61 Rear panel

Table 2-30 Ports

Port Name Connection Function

USB port

USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device

and more.

HDMI

High Definition

Media Interface

High definition audio and video signal output

port. It transmits uncompressed high definition

video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port

of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.

MIC IN Audio input port

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the

analog audio signal output from the devices such

as microphone, pickup.

MIC OUT Audio output port

Audio output port. It is to output the analog

audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

VGA

VGA video output

port

VGA video output port. Output analog video

signal. It can connect to the monitor to view

analog video.

Network port

10/100 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect

to the network cable.

PoE PORTS PoE port

Built-in switch. Support PoE function.

For PoE series product, you can use this port to

provide power to the network camera.

Power input port Power socket.

GND Ground end.

2.2.17 NVR22-8P-I/NVR22-8P-I2 Series

The figure is for reference only.

User's Manual

Figure 2-62 Rear panel

Table 2-31 Ports

Port Name Connection Function

GND Ground end.

USB port

USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device

and more.

HDMI

High Definition

Media Interface

High definition audio and video signal output

port. It transmits uncompressed high definition

video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port

of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.

MIC IN Audio input port

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the

analog audio signal output from the devices such

as microphone, pickup.

MIC OUT Audio output port

Audio output port. It is to output the analog

audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

VGA

VGA video output

port

VGA video output port. Output analog video

signal. It can connect to the monitor to view

analog video.

Network port

10/100 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect

to the network cable.

PoE PORTS PoE port

Built-in switch. Support PoE function.

For PoE series product, you can use this port to

provide power to the network camera.

Power input port Power socket.

Power switch Power on/off button.

2.2.18 NVR22-16P-I/NVR22-8P-I2 Series

The figure is for reference only.

User's Manual

Figure 2-63 Rear panel

Table 2-32 Ports

Port Name Connection Function

GND Ground end.

MIC IN Audio input port

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the analog

audio signal output from the devices such as microphone,

pickup.

MIC OUT

Audio output

port

Audio output port. It is to output the analog audio signal

to the devices such as the sound box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

RS-232

RS-232 debug

COM

It is for general COM debug to configure IP address or

transfer transparent COM data.

Network port

10/100 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the

network cable.

USB port

USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device and

more.

VGA

VGA video

output port

VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can

connect to the monitor to view analog video.

HDMI

High Definition

Media Interface

High definition audio and video signal output port. It

transmits uncompressed high definition video and

multiple-channel data to the HDMI port of the display

device. HDMI version is 1.4.

NO1

Alarm output

port

●

1 group of alarm output ports (port NO1–C1). Output

alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure

there is power to the external alarm device.

●

NO: Normal open alarm output port.

●

C: Alarm output public end.

CTRL —

Controllable power supply output.

Control the output of the on-off button

alarm relay. It controls the alarm device

with the presence or absence of

voltage. It can also be used as power

input for some alarm devices such as

alarm detectors.

The two ports

serve as

another group

of alarm

output ports.

P —

Power output port. It can provide

power to some peripheral devices such

as camera and alarm device. Make sure

the power supply of peripheral device

shall be below 1 A.

User's Manual

Port Name Connection Function

PoE PORTS PoE port

Built-in switch. Support PoE function.

For PoE series product, you can use this port to provide

power to the network camera.

Power switch Power on/off button.

Power input

port

Power socket.

2.2.19 NVR21HS-I/NVR21HS-I2 Series

The figure is for reference only.

Figure 2-64 Rear panel

Table 2-33 Rear panel description

Port Name Connection Function

GND Ground end.

USB port

USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device

and more.

HDMI

High Definition

Media Interface

High definition audio and video signal output

port. It transmits uncompressed high definition

video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port

of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.

MIC IN Audio input port

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the

analog audio signal output from the devices such

as microphone, pickup.

MIC OUT Audio output port

Audio output port. It is to output the analog

audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

User's Manual

Port Name Connection Function

VGA

VGA video output

port

VGA video output port. Output analog video

signal. It can connect to the monitor to view

analog video.

Network port

10/100 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect

to the network cable.

PoE PORTS PoE port

Built-in switch. Support PoE function.

For PoE series product, you can use this port to

provide power to the network camera.

Power input port Power socket.

2.2.20 NVR21HS-P-I/NVR21HS-P-I2 Series

The figure is for reference only.

Figure 2-65 Rear panel

Table 2-34 Ports

Port Name Connection Function

Power input port Power socket.

Network port

10/100 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect

to the network cable.

USB port

USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device

and more.

HDMI

High Definition

Media Interface

High definition audio and video signal output

port. It transmits uncompressed high definition

video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port

of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.

VGA

VGA video output

port

VGA video output port. Output analog video

signal. It can connect to the monitor to view

analog video.

MIC IN Audio input port

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the

analog audio signal output from the devices such

as microphone, pickup.

MIC OUT Audio output port

Audio output port. It is to output the analog

audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

User's Manual

Port Name Connection Function

GND Ground end.

PoE PORTS PoE port

Built-in switch. Support PoE function.

For PoE series product, you can use this port to

provide power to the network camera.

2.2.21 NVR21HS-8P-I/NVR21HS-8P-I2 Series

The figure is for reference only.

Figure 2-66 Rear panel

Table 2-35 Ports

Port Name Connection Function

GND Ground end.

USB port

USB port. Connect to mouse, USB storage device

and more.

HDMI

High Definition

Media Interface

High definition audio and video signal output

port. It transmits uncompressed high definition

video and multiple-channel data to the HDMI port

of the display device. HDMI version is 1.4.

MIC IN Audio input port

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive the

analog audio signal output from the devices such

as microphone, pickup.

MIC OUT Audio output port

Audio output port. It is to output the analog

audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

VGA

VGA video output

port

VGA video output port. Output analog video

signal. It can connect to the monitor to view

analog video.

Network port

10/100 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect

to the network cable.

PoE PORTS PoE port

Built-in switch. Support PoE function.

For PoE series product, you can use this port to

provide power to the network camera.

Power input port Power socket.

User's Manual

2.2.22 NVR4208-8P-I Series

These figures are for reference only.

Figure 2-67 Rear panel

Table 2-36 Ports

No. Port Name Function

1 Power input port Input power of 100-240 V and 50-60 Hz.

2 Power button Turns on/off the NVR.

3 PoE port

Built-in switch. It can provide power for IPC.

8 PoE ports: 1-8 are ePoE ports (support 300m @ 100M. 800m

@ 10M). The device supports 48 V, 100 W total power output

under 55 °C, and 48 V, 130 W total power output under 45 °C.

4 Network port

10/100/1000 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to

the network cable.

5 USB port

USB 3.0 port. Connect to devices such as mouse, USB storage

device and USB burner.

MIC IN

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive analog audio

signal from devices such as microphone, sound pickup.

MIC OUT

Audio output port. It is to output analog audio signal to

devices such as sound box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

7 VGA port

VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can

connect to the monitor to view analog video.

8 HDMI port

High definition audio and video signal output port. It

transmits uncompressed high definition video and multiple-

channel audio data to displays with HDMI port.

Alarm input port (1-

●

They receive signals from external alarm source. Alarm

input includes two types; NO (normal open) and NC

(normal close).

●

When your alarm input device is using external power,

make sure the device and the NVR have the same GND.

GND. Alarm input ground port.

User's Manual

No. Port Name Function

NO C One NO activation output group. (On-off button).

CTRL

Controllable power supply output. Control

the output of the on-off button alarm relay.

It controls the alarm device with the

presence or absence of voltage. It can also

be used as power input for some alarm

devices such as alarm detectors.

The two

ports serve as

another

group of

alarm output

ports.

Power output port. It can provide power to

some peripheral devices such as camera

and alarm device. Make sure the power

supply of peripheral device shall be below 1

2.2.23 NVR4216-I Series

The figure is for reference only.

Figure 2-68 Rear panel

Table 2-37 Ports

No. Port Name Function

1 Network port

10/100/1000 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the

network cable.

2 MIC OUT

Audio output port. It is to output analog audio signal to devices

such as sound box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

Alarm input port

(1-4)

●

They receive signals from external alarm source. Alarm

input includes two types; NO (normal open) and NC (normal

close).

●

When your alarm input device is using external power,

make sure the device and the NVR have the same GND.

GND. Alarm input ground port.

NO C One NO activation output group. (On-off button).

User's Manual

No. Port Name Function

CTRL

Controllable power supply output.

Control the output of the on-off button

alarm relay. It controls the alarm device

with the presence or absence of voltage.

It can also be used as power input for

some alarm devices such as alarm

detectors.

The two ports

serve as another

group of alarm

output ports.

Power output port. It can provide power

to some peripheral devices such as

camera and alarm device. Make sure the

power supply of peripheral device shall

be below 1 A.

4 Power button Turns on/off the NVR.

GND.

6 USB port

USB 3.0 port. Connect to devices such as mouse, USB storage

device and USB burner.

7 MIC IN

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive analog audio signal

from devices such as microphone, sound pickup.

8 VGA port

VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can

connect to the monitor to view analog video.

9 HDMI port

High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits

uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel

audio data to displays with HDMI port.

10 Power input port Input power of 100V-240V and 50Hz-60Hz.

2.2.24 NVR58-I/NVR58-I/L/NVR48-I Series

●

The figure takes NVR58-I/NVR58-I/L/NVR4832-I series as examples.

●

The figure is for reference only.

Figure 2-69 Rear panel

Table 2-38 Ports

No. Port Name Function

1 Power button Turns on/off the NVR.

User's Manual

No. Port Name Function

2 eSATA port

External SATA port. It can connect device with SATA port.

You need to jump the HDD when there is peripherally

connected HDD.

3 VGA port

VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can

connect to the monitor to view analog video.

4 RS-232 port

It is for general COM debugging to configure IP address and

transfer transparent COM data.

Alarm input port (1-16)

●

There are four groups: 1-4, 5-8, 9-12 and 13-16.

They receive signals from external alarm source. Alarm

input includes two types; NO (normal open) and NC

(normal close).

●

When your alarm input device is using external power,

make sure the device and the NVR have the same GND.

Alarm output port

(NO1-NO5, C1-C5, NC5)

●

Five groups of alarm output ports (Group 1: NO1-C1,

Group 2: NO2-C2, Group 3: NO3-C3, Group 4: NO4-C4,

Group 5: NO5, C5, NC5). Output alarm signal to the

external alarm device. Make sure power supply is

available for the external alarm device.

●

NO: Normal open alarm output port.

●

C: Alarm output public end.

●

NC: Normal close alarm output port.

GND. Alarm input ground port.

RS-485 port (A, B)

●

RS485_A port. Control cable A of the 485 device. It

connects external devices such as speed dome and PTZ.

●

RS485_B port. Control cable B of the 485 device. It

connects external devices such as speed dome and PTZ.

CTRL

Controllable 12 V power output. It

is to control the on-off alarm relay

output. It can be used to control

the device alarm output. At the

same time, it can also be used as

the power input source of some

devices such as alarm detector.

The two ports serve

as another group of

alarm output ports.

+12 V power output port. It can

provide power to some peripheral

devices such as camera and alarm

device. Make sure the power

supply of peripheral device shall

be below 1 A.

6 MIC IN

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive analog audio

signal from devices such as microphone, sound pickup.

User's Manual

No. Port Name Function

MIC OUT

Audio output port. It is to output analog audio signal to

devices such as sound box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

7 HDMI port

High definition audio and video signal output port. It

transmits uncompressed high definition video and

multiple-channel audio data to displays with HDMI port.

The two HDMI ports support 2-channel high definition

HDMI output of different sources.

8 USB port

USB 3.0 port. Connect to devices such as mouse, USB

storage device and USB burner.

9 Network port

10/100/1000 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to

the network cable.

10 Power input port Input power of 100-240 V and 50Hz-60Hz.

GND.

2.2.25 NVR54-I/NVR54-I/L/NVR44-I Series

●

The following figure takes NVR5432-16P-I and NVR5432-16P-I/L series as examples.

●

The figure is for reference only.

Figure 2-70 Rear panel

No. Port Name Function

1 Power button Turns on/off the NVR.

2 PoE port

Built-in switch. It can provide power for IPC.

●

16 PoE ports: 1-8 are ePoE ports (support 300m @ 100M.

800m @ 10M). 9-16 are regular PoE ports.

●

Device with 16 PoEs supports 150 W total power.

3 eSATA port

External SATA port. It can connect device with SATA port. You

need to jump the HDD when there is peripherally connected

HDD.

User's Manual

No. Port Name Function

4 HDMI port

High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits

uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel

audio data to displays with HDMI port. The two HDMI ports

support 2-channel high definition HDMI output of different

sources.

5 VGA port

VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can

connect to the monitor to view analog video.

6 RS-232 port

It is for general COM debugging to configure IP address and

transfer transparent COM data.

Alarm input port (1-

16)

●

There are four groups: 1-4, 5-8, 9-12 and 13-16.

They receive signals from external alarm source. Alarm

input includes two types; NO (normal open) and NC (normal

close).

●

When your alarm input device is using external power,

make sure the device and the NVR have the same GND.

Alarm output port

(NO1-NO5, C1-C5,

NC5)

●

Five groups of alarm output ports (Group 1: NO1-C1, Group

2: NO2-C2, Group 3: NO3-C3, Group 4: NO4-C4, Group 5:

NO5, C5, NC5). Output alarm signal to the external alarm

device. Make sure power supply is available for the external

alarm device.

●

NO: Normal open alarm output port.

●

C: Alarm output public end.

●

NC: Normal close alarm output port.

GND. Alarm input ground port.

RS-485 port (A, B)

●

RS485_A port. Control cable A of the 485 device. It connects

external devices such as speed dome and PTZ.

●

RS485_B port. Control cable B of the 485 device. It connects

external devices such as speed dome and PTZ.

CTRL

Controllable 12 V power output. It is

to control the on-off alarm relay

output. It can be used to control the

device alarm output. At the same

time, it can also be used as the power

input source of some devices such as

alarm detector.

The two ports serve

as another group of

alarm output ports.

+12 V power output port. It can

provide power to some peripheral

devices such as camera and alarm

device. Make sure the power supply of

peripheral device shall be below 1 A.

8 MIC IN

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive analog audio signal

from devices such as microphone, sound pickup.

User's Manual

No. Port Name Function

MIC OUT

Audio output port. It is to output analog audio signal to devices

such as sound box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

9 USB port

USB 3.0 port. Connect to devices such as mouse, USB storage

device and USB burner.

10 Network port

10/100/1000 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the

network cable.

11 Power input port Input power of 100V-240V and 50Hz-60Hz.

GND.

2.2.26 NVR52-16P-I/NVR52-16P-I/L/NVR52-8P-I/NVR52-8P-

I/L/NVR42-16P-I Series

These figures are for reference only.

The NVR52-16P-I/NVR52-16P-I/L series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-71 Rear panel

The NVR52-8P-I/NVR52-8P-I/L series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-72 Rear panel

The NVR4216-16P-I series rear panel is shown as below.

User's Manual

Figure 2-73 Rear panel

Table 2-39 Rear panel description

No. Port Name Function

1 Power input port Input power of 100-240 V and 50-60 Hz.

2 Power button Turns on/off the NVR.

3 PoE port

Built-in switch. It can provide power for IPC.

16 PoE ports: 1-8 are ePoE ports (support 300m @ 100M. 800m @

10M). 9-16 are regular PoE ports. The device supports 150 W

total power.

8 PoE ports: 1-8 are ePoE ports (support 300m @ 100M. 800m @

10M). The device supports 48 V, 120 W total power.

Alarm

input/output of

NVR52-16P-

I/NVR52-16P-I/L

and NVR52-8P-

I/NVR52-8P-I/L

Alarm input

port (1-4)

●

They receive signals from external alarm

source. Alarm input includes two types; NO

(normal open) and NC (normal close).

●

When your alarm input device is using

external power, make sure the device and

the NVR have the same GND.

Alarm

output port

(NO1-NO2,

C1-C2)

●

Two groups of alarm output ports (Group 1:

NO1-C1, Group 2: NO2-C2). Output alarm

signal to the external alarm device. Make

sure power supply is available for the

external alarm device.

●

NO: Normal open alarm output port.

●

C: Alarm output public end.

GND. Alarm input ground port.

RS-485 port

(A, B)

●

RS485_A port. Control cable A of the 485

device. It connects external devices such as

speed dome and PTZ.

●

RS485_B port. Control cable B of the 485

device. It connects external devices such as

speed dome and PTZ.

Alarm

input/output of

NVR4216-16P-I

Alarm input

port (1-4)

●

They receive signals from external alarm

source. Alarm input includes two types; NO

(normal open) and NC (normal close).

●

When your alarm input device is using

external power, make sure the device and

the NVR have the same GND.

User's Manual

No. Port Name Function

Alarm

output port

(NO1, C1)

●

One group of alarm output ports (Group 1:

NO1-C1). Output alarm signal to the external

alarm device. Make sure power supply is

available for the external alarm device.

●

NO: Normal open alarm output port.

●

C: Alarm output public end.

GND. Alarm input ground port.

CTRL

Controllable 12 V power

output. It is to control the

on-off alarm relay output. It

can be used to control the

device alarm output. At the

same time, it can also be

used as the power input

source of some devices

such as alarm detector.

The two ports

serve as another

group of alarm

output ports.

+12 V power output port. It

can provide power to some

peripheral devices such as

camera and alarm device.

Make sure the power supply

of peripheral device shall be

below 1 A.

5 HDMI port

High definition audio and video signal output port. It transmits

uncompressed high definition video and multiple-channel audio

data to displays with HDMI port.

6 USB port

USB 3.0 port. Connect to devices such as mouse, USB storage

device and USB burner.

7 Network port

10/100/1000 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port. Connect to the

network cable.

MIC IN

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive analog audio signal

from devices such as microphone, sound pickup.

MIC OUT

Audio output port. It is to output analog audio signal to devices

such as sound box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video playback.

9 VGA port

VGA video output port. Output analog video signal. It can

connect to the monitor to view analog video.

10 RS-232 port

It is for general COM debugging to configure IP address and

transfer transparent COM data.

GND.

User's Manual

2.2.27 NVR608-4KS2/NVR608H-XI/NVR608RH-XI Series

The NVR608-32-4KS2 series rear panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-74 Rear panel (1)

The NVR608-64-4KS2/NVR608-128-4KS2/NVR608H-32-XI/NVR608H-64-XI/NVR608H-128-XI series rear

panel is shown as below.

Figure 2-75 Rear panel (2)

Figure 2-76 Rear panel (3)

The NVR608RH-32-XI/NVR608RH-64-XI/NVR608RH-128-XI front panel is shown as below.

User's Manual

Figure 2-77 Rear panel (4)

Table 2-40 Ports description

No. Function No. Function

1 Power socket. 2

Alarm input/alarm output/RS-485

port

3 RS-232 port 4 Audio output

5 Audio input 6 VGA port

7 Network port 8 HDMI port

●

NVR608-4K: USB 2.0 port

●

NVR608-4KS2: USB 3.0 port

10 USB 3.0 port

11 eSATA port 12 Ground

2.2.28 NVR616-4KS2 Series

The general series rear panel of NVR616-4KS2 is shown as below.

Figure 2-78 Rear panel

The redundant power series rear panel of NVR616-4KS2 is shown as below.

User's Manual

Figure 2-79 Rear panel

Table 2-41 Ports

No. Name No. Name

1 Power on-off button 2 Power socket.

3 1000M fiber port 4 Network port

5 HDMI port 6 RS-232 port

7 Video VGA output 8 Audio output

9 Audio input 10 USB 3.0 port

11 USB 3.0 port 12 eSATA port

13 SAS extension port 14 Alarm input/output/RS-485 port

HDMI port

High-definition decoding card is not

installed in standard hardware

configuration, you can purchase as

needed.

— —

User's Manual

2.2.29 NVR11HS-W-S2-CE/NVR11HS-W-S2-FCC Series

Figure 2-80 Rear panel

Table 2-42 Ports

Icon Name Function

USB 2.0 port

USB 2.0 port. Connect to mouse, USB storage

device, USB burner and more.

Network port

10/100 Mbps self-adaptive Ethernet port.

Connect to the network cable.

HDMI

High Definition Media

Interface

High definition audio and video signal

output port. It transmits uncompressed high

definition video and multiple-channel data

to the HDMI port of the display device. HDMI

version is 1.4.

VGA VGA video output port

VGA video output port. Output analog video

signal. It can connect to the monitor to view

analog video.

Power input port Input 12 VDC/2 A.

MIC IN Audio input port

Bidirectional talk input port. It is to receive

the analog audio signal output from the

devices such as microphone, pickup.

User's Manual

Icon Name Function

MIC OUT Audio output port

Audio output port. It is to output the analog

audio signal to the devices such as the sound

box.

●

Bidirectional talk output.

●

Audio output on 1-window video

monitor.

●

Audio output on 1-window video

playback.

GND Ground end.

2.3 Alarm Connection

2.3.1 Alarm Port

The alarm port is shown as below. The following figure is for reference only.

Figure 2-81 Alarm port

Table 2-43 Alarm port description

Icon Function

1–16 ALARM1–ALARM16. The alarm becomes activated in the low level.

NO1 C1, NO2 C2, NO3

C3, NO4 C4

Four NO activation output groups. (On-off button).

NO5 C5 NC5 One NO/NC activation output group. (On-off button).

CTRL (CTRL 12 V)

Control power output. Disable power output when alarm is canceled.

Current is 500 mA.

P (+12 V) Rated current output. Current is 500 mA.

GND.

A/B

485 communication port. They are used to control devices such as

PTZ. Please parallel connect 120 TΩ between A/B cables if there are

too many PTZ decoders.

User's Manual

●

Different models support different alarm input ports. Please see the specifications sheet for

detailed information.

●

Slight difference might be found on the alarm port layout.

2.3.2 Alarm Input Port

Connect the positive end (+) of the alarm input device to the alarm input port (ALARM IN 1–16) of

the NVR. Connect the negative end (-) of the alarm input device to the ground end ( ) of the NVR.

Figure 2-82 Alarm input port

User's Manual

Figure 2-83 Alarm input port

●

There are two alarm input types: NO/NC.

●

When connect the ground port of the alarm device to the NVR, you can use any of the GND ports

( ).

●

Connect the NC port of the alarm device to the alarm input port (ALARM) of the NVR.

●

When there is peripheral power supplying for the alarm device, please make sure it is earthed

with the NVR.

2.3.3 Alarm Output Port

●

There is peripheral power supplying for the external alarm device.

●

In case overload might result in NVR damage, please see the following relay specifications for

detailed information.

●

A/B cable of the RS-485 is for the A/B cable connection of the speed PTZ.

2.3.4 Alarm Relay Specifications

Table 2-44 Alarm relay specifications

Model: JRC-27F

Material of the touch Silver

User's Manual

Model: JRC-27F

Rating (Resistance

Load)

Rated switch capacity 30 VDC 2 A, 125 VAC 1 A

Maximum switch power 125 VAC, 160 W

Maximum switch voltage 250 VAC, 220 VDC

Maximum switch currency 1 A

Insulation

Between touches with same

polarity

1000 VAC 1 minute

Between touches with different

polarity

1000 VAC 1 minute

Between touch and winding 1000 VAC 1 minute

Surge voltage

Between touches with same

polarity

1500 V (10×160 μs)

Length of open time 3 ms max

Length of close time 3 ms max

Longevity

Mechanical 50 × 106 MIN (3 Hz)

Electrical 200 × 103 MIN (0.5 Hz)

Temperature -40 °C to +70 °C

2.4 Two-way Talk

2.4.1 Device-end to PC-end

Step 1 Connect the speaker or the pickup to the first audio input port on the device rear panel.

Step 2 Connect the earphone or the sound box to the audio output port in the PC.

Step 3 Log in to the web and then enable the corresponding channel real-time monitor.

Step 4 Enable two-way talk.

Figure 2-84 Enable two-way talk

Step 5 At the device end, speak by the speaker or the pickup, and then you can get the audio

from the earphone or sound box at the PC end.

User's Manual

Figure 2-85 Device to PC

2.4.2 PC-end to the Device-end

Device Connection

1. Connect the speaker or the pickup to the audio output port in the PC.

2. Connect the earphone or the sound box to the first audio input port in the device rear panel.

3. Log in to the web and then enable the corresponding channel real-time monitor.

4. Enable bidirectional talk. See Figure 2-84.

Listening Operation

At the PC-end, speak by the speaker or the pickup, and then you can get the audio from the

earphone or sound box at the device-end.

Figure 2-86 PC to device

User's Manual

3 Device Installation

All the installation and operations here should conform to your local electric safety rules.

3.1 Device Installation Diagram

Please see the following diagram to install the NVR.

Figure 3-1 Installation flowchart

User's Manual

3.2 Checking Unpacked NVR

When you receive the NVR, check against the following checklist. If any of the items are missing or

damaged, contact the local retailer or after-sales service immediately.

Table 3-1 Checklist

Sequence Item Description

Overall

packaging

Appearance No obvious damage.

Package Not distorted or broken.

Accessories Nothing missing.

2 The Device

Appearance No obvious damage.

Model

The model description is consistent with the

contract.

Label

Not torn up.

Keep the label well. You need to provide the

serial number on the label when calling the

after-sales service.

3.3 HDD Installation

For the first time installation, make sure whether the HDD has been installed or not. We recommend

to use HDD of enterprise level or surveillance level. It is not recommended to use PC HDD.

●

Shut off the power before you replace the HDD.

●

Use the dedicated SATA HDD for monitoring recommended by the HDD manufacturer.

●

You can see the Appendix for HDD space information and recommended HDD brand.

3.3.1 NVR41-4KS2/NVR41-P-4KS2/NVR41-8P-4KS2/NVR41-

4KS2/L/NVR41-P-4KS2/L/NVR41-8P-4KS2/L/NVR21-4KS2/NVR21-P-

4KS2/NVR21-8P-4KS2/NVR21-W-4KS2/NVR21-I/NVR21-I2/NVR21-P-

I/NVR21-P-I2/NVR21-8P-I/NVR21-8P-I2/NVR21-S3/NVR21-P-

S3/NVR21-8P-S3

Connect cable and then secure the HDD on the NVR if it is not convenient to connect the HDD data

cable and power cable at first.

Procedure

Step 1 Loosen the screws of the bottom of the chassis.

User's Manual

Figure 3-2 Lossen screws

Step 2 Place the HDD in accordance with the four holes in the bottom.

Figure 3-3 Aligh HDD

Step 3 Turn the device upside down and then secure the screws firmly.

User's Manual

Figure 3-4 Secure screws

Step 4 Connect the HDD cable and power cable to the HDD and the mainboard respectively.

Figure 3-5 Connect cables

Step 5 Put the cover back and then fix the screws of the rear panel. The installation is complete.

User's Manual

Figure 3-6 Put back the cover

3.3.2 NVR41HS-4KS2/NVR41HS-P-4KS2/NVR41HS-8P-

4KS2/NVR41HS-4KS2/L/NVR41HS-P-4KS2/L/NVR41HS-8P-

4KS2/L/NVR21HS-4KS2/NVR21HS-P-4KS2/NVR21HS-8P-

4KS2/NVR21HS-W-4KS2/NVR11HS-S3H/NVR11HS-P-S3H/NVR11HS-

8P-S3H/NVR21HS-I/NVR21HS-I2/NVR21HS-P-I/NVR21HS-P-

I2/NVR21HS-8P-I/NVR21HS-8P-I2/NVR21HS-S3/NVR21HS-P-

S3/NVR21HS-8P-S3/NVR11HS-W-S2-CE/NVR11HS-W-S2-FCC Series

Procedure

Step 1 Loosen the screws of the upper cover and side panel.

Figure 3-7 Loosen screws

Step 2 Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow as shown in the figure below.

User's Manual

Figure 3-8 Remove cover

Step 3 Turn over the device, and align the HDD to the four holes of bottom panel, and then fix the

HDD with screws.

Figure 3-9 Align HDD

Step 4 Connect HDD to the device using data cable and power cable.

Figure 3-10 Connect cables

Step 5 Put the cover in accordance with the clip and then fix the screws on the rear panel and side

panel.

User's Manual

Figure 3-11 Put cover back

3.3.3 NVR22-8P-S2/NVR42-4KS2/NVR42-P-4KS2/NVR42-8P-

4KS2/NVR42-16P-4KS2/NVR42-4KS2/L/NVR42-P-4KS2/L/NVR42-8P-

4KS2/L/NVR42-16P-4KS2/L/NVR52-4KS2/NVR52-8P-4KS2/NVR52-

16P-4KS2/ NVR52-24P-4KS2/NVR22-4KS2/NVR22-P-4KS2/NVR22-

8P-4KS2/NVR52-8P-4KS2E/NVR22-I/NVR22-I2/NVR22-P-I/NVR22-P-

I2/NVR22-8P-I/NVR22-8P-I2/NVR22-16P-I/NVR22-16P-I2/NVR42-

I/NVR42-8P-I/NVR42-16P-I/NVR52-16P-I/NVR52-16P-I/L/NVR52-8P-

I/NVR52-8P-I/L Series

Different models have different numbers of HDDs.

Procedure

Step 1 Remove the four fixing screws on the rear panel.

Figure 3-12 Remove screws

User's Manual

Step 2 Remove the case cover along the direction shown in the following arrow.

Figure 3-13 Remove cover

Step 3 Match the four holes on the baseboard to place the HDD.

Figure 3-14 Align HDD

Step 4 Turn the device upside down, match the screws with the holes on the HDD and then fasten

them. The HDD is fixed to the baseboard.

Figure 3-15 Fasten screws

User's Manual

Step 5 Connect the HDD data cable and power cable to the device.

Figure 3-16 Connect cables

Step 6 Put back the cover and fasten the four screws on the rear panel to complete the

installation.

Figure 3-17 Put back cover

3.3.4 NVR54-4KS2/NVR54-16P-4KS2/NVR44-4KS2/NVR44-16P-

4KS2/NVR44-4KS2/L/NVR44-16P-4KS2/L/NVR54-24P-4KS2/NVR54-

16P-4KS2E/NVR58-I/NVR58-I/L/NVR54-I/NVR54-I/L/NVR52-I/NVR52-

User's Manual

I/L/NVR42-I/NVR42-8P-I/NVR44-I/NVR48-I/NVR608-32-4KS2/NVR44-

4KS2/I/NVR44-16P-4KS2/I/NVR48-4KS2/I/NVR48-16P-4KS2/I Series

Different models have different number of HDDs.

Procedure

Step 1 Remove the fixing screws on the rear panel of the device.

Figure 3-18 Remove screws

Step 2 Remove the case cover along the direction shown in the following arrow.

Figure 3-19 Remove cover

Step 3 Remove the screws on the sides of HDD bracket to take out the bracket.

●

1.5U device has one HDD bracket. For the way to remove the bracket, see Figure 3-20

●

2U device has two HDD brackets. For the way to remove the brackets, see Figure 3-21.

User's Manual

Figure 3-20 Remove screws (1.5U)

Figure 3-21 Remove screws (2U)

Step 4 Match the four screw holes on the HDD with the four holes on the bracket and then fasten

the screws.

The HDD is fixed to the bracket.

Figure 3-22 Fasten screws

Step 5 see Step 4 to install other HDDs.

User's Manual

Figure 3-23 Install more HDDs

Step 6 Lock the two HDD brackets.

This step is required for 2U devices only.

Figure 3-24 Lock brackets

Step 7 Place the bracket to the device and then fasten the screws on the sides of the bracket.

Figure 3-25 Fasten screws

User's Manual

Step 8 Connect the HDD data cable and power cable to the device.

The following figure is for reference only.

Figure 3-26 Connect cables

Step 9 Put back the cover and fasten the screws on the rear panel to complete the installation.

Figure 3-27 Fasten screws

3.3.5 NVR608-64-4KS2/NVR608-128-4KS2/NVR608H-32-

XI/NVR608H-64-XI/NVR608H-128-XI Series

Step 1 Unlock the lock on the front panel.

User's Manual

Figure 3-28 Unlock front panel

Step 2 Press the button on the 2 sides to open the front panel.

Figure 3-29 Open front panel

Step 3 Match the 4 screw holes on the HDD with the 4 holes on the bracket and then fasten the

screws.

Figure 3-30 Fasten HDD

Step 4 Push the HDD box into the device.

User's Manual

Figure 3-31 Unlock front panel

Step 5 Close the front panel and then tighten the lock on the front panel.

Figure 3-32 Lock front panel

3.3.6 NVR616-4KS2 Series

The following figures are for reference only.

Procedure

Step 1 Press the red button on the HDD box, open the handle and then pull out the HDD box.

Figure 3-33 Take out HDD box

Step 2 Put the HDD into the HDD box along the direction shown in the following arrow.

User's Manual

Figure 3-34 Put HDD into box

Step 3 Fasten the screws on the sides of the HDD box.

Figure 3-35 Fasten screws

Step 4 Insert the HDD box into the HDD slot, press it to the bottom, and then close the box

handle.

If you have not pushed the HDD box to the bottom, do not close the handle to avoid any

damage to the HDD slot

User's Manual

Figure 3-36 Close the handle

3.4 CD-ROM Installation

Step 1 Open the top cover and then remove the HDD bracket.

Figure 3-37 Open the top cover

Step 2 Take off the bottom of the HDD bracket and CD-ROM bracket.

Figure 3-38 Take out HDD bracket

User's Manual

Figure 3-39 Take out CD-ROM bracket

Step 3 Fix the CD-ROM bracket at the HDD bracket.

Figure 3-40 Fix bracket

Step 4 Install a pair of the CD-ROM bracket. Please make sure that the reverse side is secure too.

Figure 3-41 Install bracket

Figure 3-42 Install bracket (reverse side)

Step 5 Install SATA burner. Line up the SATA burner to the hole positions.

User's Manual

Figure 3-43 Install SATA burner

Step 6 Use screw driver to fix the screws.

Figure 3-44 Fasten screws

Step 7 Put the bracket back. Please adjust the CD-ROM to the proper position so that the button

of the front panel is directly facing the pop-up button of the CD-ROM.

User's Manual

Figure 3-45 Put bracket back

Step 8 Connect the SATA cable and power wire.

Figure 3-46 Connect cables

Step 9 Secure the HDD bracket and put the top cover back.

User's Manual

Figure 3-47 Put cover back

3.5 Connection Sample

The following figures are for reference only and might differ from the actual product.

3.5.1 NVR41-4KS2/NVR41-P-4KS2/NVR41-8P-4KS2/NVR41-

4KS2/L/NVR41-P-4KS2/L/NVR41-8P-4KS2/L/NVR21-4KS2/NVR21-P-

4KS2/NVR21-8P-4KS2/NVR21-I/NVR21-I2/NVR21-P-I/NVR21-P-

I2/NVR21-8P-I/NVR21-8P-I2/NVR21-S3/NVR21-P-S3/NVR21-8P-S3

User's Manual

Series

Figure 3-48 Typical connection

3.5.2 NVR21-W-4KS2/NVR21HS-W-4KS2 Series

Figure 3-49 Typical connection

User's Manual

3.5.3 NVR11HS-S3H/NVR11HS-P-S3H/NVR11HS-8P-S3H/NVR41HS-

4KS2/NVR41HS-P-4KS2/NVR41HS-8P-4KS2/NVR41HS-

4KS2/L/NVR41HS-P-4KS2/L/NVR41HS-8P-4KS2/L/NVR21HS-

4KS2/NVR21HS-P-4KS2/NVR21HS-8P-4KS2/NVR21HS-I/NVR21HS-

I2/NVR21HS-P-I/NVR21HS-P-I2/NVR21HS-8P-I/NVR21HS-8P-

I2/NVR21HS-S3/NVR21HS-P-S3/NVR21HS-8P-S3 Series

Figure 3-50 Typical connection

3.5.4 NVR22-4KS2/NVR22-P-4KS2/NVR22-8P-4KS2/NVR22-I/NVR22-

I2/NVR22-P-I/NVR22-P-I2/NVR22-8P-I/NVR22-8P-I2/NVR22-16P-

User's Manual

I/NVR22-16P-I2 Series

Figure 3-51 Typical connection

3.5.5 NVR52-4KS2/NVR52-8P-4KS2/NVR52-16P-4KS2/NVR52-24P-

4KS2/NVR52-8P-4KS2E/NVR52-16P-4KS2E Series

Figure 3-52 Typical connection

3.5.6 NVR42-4KS2/NVR42-P-4KS2/NVR42-8P-4KS2/NVR42-16P-

User's Manual

4KS2/NVR42-4KS2/L/NVR42-P-4KS2/L/NVR42-8P-4KS2/L/NVR42-

16P-4KS2/L Series

Figure 3-53 Typical connection

3.5.7 NVR54-4KS2/NVR54-16P-4KS2/NVR58-4KS2/NVR58-16P-

4KS2/NVR54-24P-4KS2/NVR54-16P-4KS2E/NVR58-16P-4KS2E Series

Figure 3-54 Typical connection

3.5.8 NVR44-4KS2/NVR44-16P-4KS2/NVR44-4KS2/L/NVR44-16P-

User's Manual

4KS2/L/NVR44-4KS2/I/NVR44-16P-4KS2/I Series

Figure 3-55 Typical connection

3.5.9 NVR48-4KS2/NVR48-16P-4KS2/NVR48-4KS2/L/NVR48-16P-

User's Manual

4KS2/L/NVR48-4KS2/I/NVR48-16P-4KS2/I Series

Figure 3-56 Typical connection

User's Manual

3.5.10 NVR58-I/NVR58-I/L/NVR48-I Series

Figure 3-57 Typical connection

3.5.11 NVR54-I/NVR54-I/L/NVR44-I

Figure 3-58 Typical connection

3.5.12 NVR52-16P-I/NVR52-16P-I/L/NVR52-8P-I/NVR52-8P-

User's Manual

I/L/NVR42-8P-I/NVR42-16P-I Series

Figure 3-59 Typical connection

3.5.13 NVR4216-I Series

Figure 3-60 Typical connection

3.5.14 NVR608-4KS2/NVR608H-XI/NVR608RH-XI Series

The following figure is for reference only and might differ from the actual product.

User's Manual

Figure 3-61 Typical connection

3.5.15 NVR616-4KS2 Series

Figure 3-62 Typical connection

User's Manual

4 Starting the Device

●

For device security, connect the NVR to the power adapter first and then connect the device to

the power socket.

●

The rated input voltage matches the device power button. Make sure the power wire connection

is OK. Then press the power button.

●

Always use the stable current, if necessary UPS is a best alternative measure.

Procedure

Step 1 Connect the device to the monitor and then connect a mouse.

Step 2 Connect power cable.

Step 3 Press the power button on the front panel or turn on the power switch on the rear panel to

start up the device.

After the device starts, the system is in multiple-channel display mode by default.

The Device will verify license during starting up. If the verification failed, the icon is

displayed on the screen. Contact the technical support.

User's Manual

5 Local Operations

The following figures are for reference only. Slight difference might be found on the actual interface.

5.1 Initialization

●

For first-time use, set a login password for the admin account (default user).

●

We recommend setting password protection so that you can reset password in case you forgot.

●

For your device safety, keep your login password well, and change the password regularly.

●

The IP address of the Device is 192.168.1.108 by default.

Procedure

Step 1 Start the NVR.

Step 2 Set region, time zone, and time according to the actual situation, and then click

Click to shut down the device. The system integrator or the user can shut down the

Device directly after setting the time zone.

Step 3 Set the login password for the admin account and then click

Figure 5-1 Set password

Table 5-1 Password parameters

Parameter Description

User By default, the user is admin.

Password

Enter the password for admin and then confirm the password.

Confirm Password

User's Manual

Parameter Description

Password Hint

Enter the information that can remind you of the password.

On the login window, click to display the password hint.

Step 4 Set unlock pattern.

●

The pattern that you want to set must cross at least four points.

●

If you do not want to configure the unlock pattern, click

Skip

●

Once you have configured the unlock pattern, the system will require the unlock

pattern as the default login method. If you did not configure the unlock pattern, you

need to enter password for login.

Figure 5-2 Draw unlock pattern

Step 5 Set password protection.

●

After configuration, if you forgot the password for admin user, you can reset the

password through the linked email address or security questions. For details on

resetting the password, see "5.13.3 Resetting Password".

●

If you do not need password protection, disable

Reserved Email

and

Security

Question

User's Manual

Figure 5-3 Set password protection

Table 5-2 Security question parameters

Password Protection

Mode

Description

Email Address

Enter the linked email address.

Enter an email address for password reset. If you forgot the

password, enter the security code that you will get from this linked

email address to reset the password of admin.

Security Questions

Configure the security questions and answers.

If you forgot the password, you can reset the password after

entering the answers to the questions.

Step 6 Click

Save

5.2 Startup Wizard

After initialization, the system goes to

Startup Wizard

. You can quickly configure your device.

Startup Wizard

is displayed only when you log in to the Device for the first time or have restored

the Device to factory settings.

Step 1 Select

Auto Check for Updates

, and then click

If you select the

Auto Check for Updates

checkbox, the system will notify you

automatically when updates are available.

User's Manual

Figure 5-4 Startup wizard

Step 2 Configure IP address, and then click

The number of network adapters might vary with models. Configure the IP address of the

network adapter according to the actual connection situation.

1) Click .

Figure 5-5 Edit network adapter

2) Configure parameters.

Table 5-3 Network parameters

Parameter Description

Network Mode

User's Manual

Parameter Description

Default Ethernet Port

●

Single NIC

: Two network adapters work separately. If one of the

two network adapters is disconnected, the system network

status is regarded as offline.

●

Fault Tolerance

: Two network adapters share one IP address.

Normally only one network adapter is working. When this

adapter fails, the other network adapter will start working

automatically to ensure the network connection.

◇

When you test the network status, the network is regarded as

offline only when both network adapters are disconnected.

◇

The two network adapters are used under the same LAN.

●

Load Balance

: Two network adapters share one IP address. The

two adapters work at the same time to share the network load

averagely. If one of them fails, the other can continue working

normally.

◇

When testing the network status, the network is regarded as

offline only when both of the two network adapters are

disconnected.

◇

The two network adapters are used under the same LAN.

The Device with single Ethernet port does not support this function.

IP Version

Select

IPv4

IPv6

. Both versions are supported for access.

DHCP Enable the system to automatically obtain a dynamic IP address.

MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the Device.

IP Address

●

Enter the IP address and then configure the corresponding

subnet mask and default gateway.

●

After configuration, click

Test

to check whether there is conflict

in IP address.

IP address and default gateway must be on the same network

segment.

Subnet Mask

Default Gateway

To unbind NIC, on the

TCP/IP

page, click . The unbinding will take effect after the

Device restarts.

3) On the

TCP/IP

page, configure DNS server. This step should be performed when you

enable the domain name service.

You can get DNS server address or manually enter it.

●

Automatically get DNS server address: When there is a DHCP server in the network,

you can enable

DHCP

, and then the Device gets a dynamic IP address.

User's Manual

●

Enter DNS server address: Select

IP Version

, and then configure the preferred DNS

server and alternate DNS server.

4) On the

Default Card

drop-down list, select the default NIC.

5) Click

Step 3 Enable

P2P

, and then click

Scan the QR code on the actual interface to download the app. Register an account and

then you can add the Device to the app.

Before using the P2P function, make sure that the NVR has connected to the WAN.

The

Status

becomes

Online

after you successfully configure P2P.

Figure 5-6 P2P

Step 4 Add cameras according to the actual situation.

After adding cameras, you can view the video images transmitted from the cameras, and

change camera configuration.

●

The number of cameras that can be added to the NVR varies with models.

●

The system supports adding camera through searching, manual add and batch add.

This section uses adding by searching as an example.

●

Initialize the camera before adding to the Device.

1) Click

Search Device

The devices found are displayed at the upper pane, excluding devices already added.

User's Manual

100

Figure 5-7 Search device

●

To view the live image of a camera, click

LIVE

and then enter the username and

password. You can only view live images of cameras accessed through private

protocol.

●

To filter the remote devices, select device name from the

Filter

drop-down list.

●

To filter out the uninitialized devices, click the

Not Initialized

tab, and then you can

initialize the devices remotely.

●

To view all remote devices added through plug and play, click the

Not Auto

Connected

tab. You can remove devices added through plug and play, and they

can be automatically added again after plug and play is enabled.

2) (Optional) Enable

Plug and Play

When

Plug and Play

is enabled, the Device automatically adds cameras on the same

LAN.

For uninitialized cameras, the Device automatically initializes them before adding

them.

3) Enable

H.265 Auto Switch

When

H.265 Auto Switch

is enabled, the video compression standard of added remote

devices is switched to H.265 automatically.

4) Double-click a camera, or select a camera and then click

Add

to register it to the

Added

Device

list.

5) Click

Step 5 Manage HDD. You can view HDD name, physical position, health status, capacity, and

more.

User's Manual

101

●

To configure read/write property, select an option from the

Properties

drop-down list.

●

To format an HDD, select the HDD, and then click

Format

Figure 5-8 Manage HDD

Step 6 Click

When the Device prompts whether to restart, click

. The configurations through startup

wizard take effect after the Device restarts.

5.3 Login

Step 1 Right-click the live page, and then click the shortcut menu.

●

If you have configured unlock pattern, the unlock pattern login window is displayed.

Click

Forgot Pattern

to switch to password login.

●

If you did not configure unlock pattern, the password login window is displayed.

User's Manual

102

Figure 5-9 Unlock pattern login

User's Manual

103

Figure 5-10 Password login

Step 2 Draw unlock pattern, or enter password and then click

5.4 Main Menu

After login, right-click the live page, and then click

Main Menu

User's Manual

104

Figure 5-11 Main menu

Table 5-4 Main menu description

No. Description

1 Click each tile to open the corresponding configuration page.

2 Go back to live view.

3 Point to the icon to view the current username.

4 Log out of, restart, or shut down the Device.

Click the icon to get the QR codes of mobile client and device SN. You

can add the Device to the mobile client for remote management.

Configure the settings of camera, network, storage, system, security and

account.

5.5 Quick Operation Bar

You can click the icons on the main menu to go to the corresponding configuration page. After that,

you can go to other function tiles or setting item through the quick operation bar.

This section uses

ALARM

and

CAMERA

as examples to show how to quickly access other modules.

User's Manual

105

Shortcut Icons on Function Titles

Click

ALARM

to go to the

ALARM

page.

Figure 5-12 Quick operation bar (1)

Table 5-5 Quick operation bar description (1)

Icon Description

Go to the

page.

Go to the

ALARM

page.

Go to the

page.

Go to the

POS

page.

Go to

NETWORK

page.

Go to the

MAINTAIN

page.

Go to the

BACKUP

page.

Go to the

DISPLAY

page.

Go to the

AUDIO

page.

Shortcut Icons on Setting Menu

Click

CAMERA

to go to the

CAMERA

page.

User's Manual

106

Figure 5-13 Quick operation bar (2)

Table 5-6 Quick operation bar description (2)

Icon Description

Go to the

CAMERA

page.

Go to the

NETWORK

page.

Go to the

STORAGE

page.

Go to the

SYSTEM

page.

Go to the

SECURITY

page.

Go to the

ACCOUNT

page.

5.6 Live View

After you logged in, the system goes to multiple-channel live view mode by default. You can view

the live video of each channel.

The number of window splits might vary depending on the model you are using.

5.6.1 Live Page

On the live view page, you can view the live video of each channel. The corresponding channel

displays date, time, and channel name after you overlay the corresponding information.

User's Manual

107

Table 5-7 Icon description

No. Icon Description

The current channel is recording.

Motion detection alarm occurs.

Video loss alarm occurs.

The current channel is in monitor lock status.

The Device connects to the network camera remotely.

This function is available on select models.

5.6.2 Navigation bar

You can quickly perform operations through the icons on the navigation bar.

The navigation bar might vary with models.

Step 1 After login, right-click the live page, and then select

Main Menu

Step 2 Select

System

General

Basic

Step 3 Click to enable navigation bar.

Step 4 On the live page, click any position and then the navigation appears at the bottom.

Figure 5-14 Navigation bar

Table 5-8 Navigation bar description

Icon Function

Open

Main Menu

Expand or condense the navigation bar.

Select view layout.

Go to the previous screen.

Go to the next screen.

Enable tour function. The icon switches to .

If you close the tour or the triggered tour operation has canceled,

the Device restores the previous preview video.

Open the PTZ control panel. For details, see "5.6.7.2 PTZ Control".

Configure image settings. For details, see "5.7.4 Configuring

Image Settings".

This function is supported only in single-channel layout.

Search for records. For detail, see "5.8.2.1 Search Page".

Open the

Voice Broadcast

page. For detail, see"5.18.3 Broadcast".

User's Manual

108

Icon Function

Open the

Alarm Status

interface to view the device alarm status.

For details, see "5.10.2 Alarm Status".

Open the

Channel Info

interface to display the information of

each channel.

Open the

Add Camera

page..

Open the

NETWORK

page. For details, see "5.19.3 Network".

Open the

Disk Manager

page. For details, see "5.12.2 Disk

Manager".

Open the

USB Management

page. You can view USB

information, back up files, and update the system.

Switch to the sub screen.

5.6.3 Live View Control Bar

Point to the top center of the video of current channel; and then the live view control bar appears.

If your mouse stays in this area for more than 6 seconds and has no operation, the control bar

automatically hides.

●

Disable the navigation bar before using this function.

●

The live view control bar is different depending on the model.

Figure 5-15 Live view control bar

Table 5-9 Live view control bar description

No. Name No. Name

1 Instant playback. 5 Two-way talk.

2 Digital zoom. 6 Stream switch.

3 Instant backup. 7 Picture search.

4 Manual snapshot. 8 Quick pick.

User's Manual

109

5.6.3.1 Instant Playback

You can play back the previous 5-60 minutes record of current channel.

Click for instant playback.

Figure 5-16 Instant playback

●

Move the slider to choose the time you want to start playing.

●

You can start, pause and close playback.

●

The information such as channel name and recording status icon are shielded during instant

playback and will not display until you exit playback.

●

During playback, screen split layout switch is not allowed.

●

Tour has high higher priority than the instant playback. The instant playback function is not

available when tour function is in process and the live view control bar automatically hides

either. The function becomes available again after tour ends.

Go to the

Main Menu

SYSTEM

General

Basic

to set instant playback time.

5.6.3.2 Digital Zoom

You can zoom in a specified zone of the current channel to view details. They system supports multi-

channel zoom. You can use the digital zoom in the following two ways:

●

Click . The icon switches to . Select an area. The area is enlarged after you release the

mouse button.

For some models, when the image is enlarged in this way, the selected area is zoomed

proportionally according to the window.

User's Manual

110

●

Point to the center that you want to enlarge, and then scroll the mouse to enlarge the area.

When the image is in the enlarged status, you can drag the image toward any direction to view the

other enlarged areas. Right-click to cancel zoom and go back to the original video image.

Figure 5-17 Zoom

5.6.3.3 Instant Backup

You can record the video of any channel and save the clip to a USB storage device.

Clicking to start the recording. To stop recording, click this icon again. The clip is automatically

saved to the connected USB storage device.

5.6.3.4 Manual Snapshot

You can take one to five snapshots of the video and save to a USB storage device.

Click to take snapshots. The snapshots are automatically saved to the connected USB storage

device. You can view the snapshots on your PC.

To change the quantity of snapshots, select

Main Menu

CAMERA

Encode

Snapshot

, in the

Manual Snapshot

list, select the snapshot quantity.

5.6.3.5 Two-way Talk

You can perform the voice interaction between the NVR and the remote device to improve efficiency

of emergency.

Procedure

Step 1 Click to start two-way talk. The icon changes to . The rest two-way talk buttons of

digital channel become dimmed.

Step 2 Click again to cancel two-way talk.

5.6.3.6 Stream Switch

Click to switch the bit stream type of the main stream and sub stream according to current

network bandwidth.

●

M: Main stream: Its bit streams are big and definition is high. It occupies large network bandwidth

suitable for video wall surveillance, storage and more.

●

S: Sub stream: Its definition is low but occupies small network bandwidth. It is suitable for general

surveillance, remote connection and more. Some models support two sub streams (S1, S2).

User's Manual

111

5.6.3.7 Picture Search

Select the image of target person on the live view page and then search by image for all the related

videos with the target person.

Procedure

Step 1 Click . The live image is frozen.

Step 2 Draw a search range according to the on-screen prompt, and then click

You can adjust the searching area. Make sure that there are less than 30 faces in the

selected range.

Figure 5-18 Draw a searching range

Step 3 Select the target face that you want to search for. You can select maximum 8 target faces.

Step 4 Click

. The search results are displayed.

User's Manual

112

Figure 5-19 Picture search results

Related Operations

●

Play video.

Select the picture and then click to play back the video within 10 seconds before and after

the snapshot. During playback, you can

◇

Click to pause.

◇

Click to stop.

◇

Click to display or hide the intelligent rules.

●

Add tag.

Select the picture and then click

Add Tag

to add a tag to the recorded video to find the target

recorded video more fast.

●

Lock recorded video.

If you want to keep the recorded video permanently, select the picture, and then click

Lock

. The

locked video cannot be overwritten and deleted.

●

Back up recorded video or picture.

Select the picture, and then click

Backup

. You can set save path, backup type, and file type, and

then export to the external storage device.

5.6.3.8 Quick Pick

When connected with select IPC cameras, Quick Pick technology becomes available, allowing human

and vehicle targets to be easily searched for and picked out.

Step 1 Click to freeze the live page.

Step 2 Drag the anchor points to draw a searching area.

You can adjust the searching area. Make sure that there are less than 30 targets in the

selected area.

User's Manual

113

Figure 5-20 Quick pick

Step 3 Click

The search results are displayed.

Figure 5-21 Search results

Step 4 (Optional) Click

Search Condition

, change the search conditions, and then click

You can only select up to 8 targets for search.

User's Manual

114

Figure 5-22 Search conditions

Step 5 Hover over a search result to view the basic information including channel, start time, end

time and target type. Double-click a result to play the video.

You can select one or more search results and then click

Backup

to back up the results.

5.6.4 Shortcut Menu

Right-click the live view page to bring up the shortcut menu. You can go to main menu, play back

videos or images, configure view split, and configure the settings of PTZ, image, and more.

The shortcut menu is different for different models.

User's Manual

115

Figure 5-23 Shortcut menu (1)

User's Manual

116

Figure 5-24 Shortcut menu (2)

Figure 5-25 Shortcut menu (3)

Table 5-10 Shortcut menu description

Function Description

Main Menu Go to main menu.

Search Search and play back videos or images.

PTZ Control Open the PTZ control panel. For details, see "5.6.7 PTZ".

User's Manual

117

Function Description

View

1/4/8/9/16/25/36

Configure the live view screen as a single-channel layout or multi-channel

layout.

Sequence

Set customized screen split mode and channels. For details, see "5.6.9

Sequence".

Add Camera Add cameras to the Device.

Wireless Pairing Quickly add IPCs. For details, see "5.6.8 Wireless Pairing".

Split Track Split the screen of a certain channel. For details, see "5.6.6 Split Tracking".

Manual Control

●

Record Mode

: You can configure the recording mode as

Auto

Manual

, or stop the recording. You can also enable or disable

snapshot function

●

Alarm Mode

: You can configure alarm output settings.

Live Mode

Select

General

AI Mode

. In the AI mode, the information of detected

face, human or vehicles are displayed on the right side of the live page.

Crowd Distribution

Select

to enable or disable crowd distribution function.

Auto Focus

Click to realize auto focus function.

Make sure the connected camera supports this function.

Image

Click to modify the camera image parameters. For details, see "5.7.4

Configuring Image Settings".

Sub Screen

Click

Sub Screen

to switch to the current monitor to the sub screen.

Smart Tracking Enable smart tracking to track targets manually or automatically.

Mirror Sub Screen Displays the image of the sub screen on the main screen.

5.6.5 AI Live View Mode

When you select AI mode, the system displays information of human face, personnel, vehicle and

non-motor vehicle on the right side of the live page, and it supports to play back records and display

feature attributes.

You need to enable face detection, body detection, vehicle detection and non-motor vehicle

detection to support this function. For details, see "5.9.8.2 Configuring Video Metadata".

Procedure

Step 1 Right-click the live page, and then select

AI Mode

Live Mode

User's Manual

118

Figure 5-26 AI live view

Step 2 (Optional) Double-click the image on the right to play the corresponding video.

Step 3 Click , and then select the face attributes that you want to display. You can select up to

four attributes.

User's Manual

119

Figure 5-27 Face vehicle properties

Step 4 Click

The system can display four attributes at most.

5.6.6 Split Tracking

You can track window split for a certain channel.

This function is for select models only.

Procedure

Step 1 Right-click the live page, and then select

Split Track

User's Manual

120

Figure 5-28 Split track

Step 2 Select a split mode.

Figure 5-29 Split mode

Split mode includes full screen, 1 main screen + 3 split screens and 1 main screen + 5 split

screens.

●

You can move the rectangles with color to adjust the videos displayed on split screens.

●

You can scroll the mouse in split screens to zoom in or out the video.

User's Manual

121

Figure 5-30 Split display

5.6.7 PTZ

PTZ is a mechanical platform that carries a camera and a protective cover and performs overall

control remotely. A PTZ can move in both horizontal and vertical direction to provide all-around

view to the camera.

Before you control the PTZ, make sure the PTZ decoder and the NVR network connection is OK.

5.6.7.1 PTZ Settings

You can set different PTZ parameters for local type and remote type. Before you use local PTZ, make

sure you have set PTZ protocol; otherwise you cannot control the local PTZ.

●

Local: The PTZ device connects to the NVR through the cable.

●

Remote: The PTZ device connects to the NVR through the network.

This function is available on select models.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main menu

Camera

PTZ

User's Manual

122

Figure 5-31 PTZ (local)

Figure 5-32 PTZ (remote)

Step 2 Configure parameters.

Table 5-11 PTZ parameters

Parameter Description

Channel Select the channel that you want to connect the PTZ camera to.

Type

●

Local: Connect through RS-485 port.

●

Remote: Connect through network by adding IP address of PTZ camera

to the Device.

User's Manual

123

Parameter Description

Protocol Select the protocol for the PTZ camera such as PELCOD.

Address

Enter the address for PTZ camera. The default is 1.

The entered address must be the same with the address configured on the

PTZ camera; otherwise the system cannot control PTZ camera.

Baud rate Select the baud rate for the PTZ camera. The default is 9600.

Data Bit The default value is 8.

Stop Bit The default value is 1.

Parity

The default value is

None

Step 3 Click

Apply

5.6.7.2 PTZ Control

You can use the PTZ control panel to perform the operations such as directing camera in eight

directions, adjusting zoom, focus and iris settings, and quick positioning.

Basic PTZ Control Panel

Right-click the live page, and then select

PTZ Control

Figure 5-33 Basic PTZ control panel

●

The gray button means system does not support current function.

●

For some model, the PTZ function is available only in one-window mode.

Table 5-12 PTZ control parameters

Parameter Description

Speed

Controls the movement speed. The bigger the value, the faster the

movement.

Zoom

: Zoom out.

: Zoom in.

Focus

: Focus far.

: Focus near.

Iris

: Image darker.

: Image brighter.

User's Manual

124

Parameter Description

PTZ movement Supports eight directions.

Fast positioning button.

●

Positioning: Click the icon, and the click any point on the live page.

The PTZ will turn to this point and locate this point in the center.

●

Zooming: Click the icon, and then drag to draw a square on the view.

The square supports zooming.

◇

Drag upward to zoom out, and drag downward to zoom in.

◇

The smaller the square, the larger the zoom effect.

This function is available on select models, and can only be controlled

through mouse operations.

Click the icon, and then you can control the four directions (left, right, up,

and down) of PTZ movement through mouse operation.

Open the expanded PTZ control panel.

Expanded PTZ Control Panel

On the basic PTZ control panel, click to open the expanded PTZ control panel to find more

options. See Figure 5-34.

Figure 5-34 Expanded PTZ control bar

●

The functions with buttons in gray are not supported by the system.

●

Right-click once to return to the interface of PTZ basic control panel.

Table 5-13 PTZ functions

Icon Function Icon Function

Preset

Pan

Tour

Flip

Pattern

Reset

Scan

Click the

AUX Config

icon to open

the PTZ functions settings interface.

AUX Switch

Click the

Enter Menu

icon to open

the

PTZ Menu

interface.

User's Manual

125

5.6.7.3 Configuring PTZ Functions

5.6.7.3.1 Configuring Presets

Procedure

Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, click .

Figure 5-35 Preset

Step 2 Click the direction arrows to the required position.

Step 3 In the

Preset

box, enter the value to represent the required position.

Step 4 Click

Setting

to complete the preset settings.

5.6.7.3.2 Configuring Tours

Procedure

Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, click .

Step 2 Click the

Tour

tab.

User's Manual

126

Figure 5-36 Tour

Step 3 In the

Tour No.

box, enter the value for the tour route.

Step 4 In the

Preset

box, enter the preset value.

Step 5 Click

Add Preset

A preset will be added for this tour.

●

You can repeat adding more presets.

●

Click

Delete Preset

to delete the preset for this tour. This operation can be repeated to

delete more presets. Some protocols do not support deleting.

5.6.7.3.3 Configuring Patterns

Procedure

Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, click .

Step 2 Click the

Pattern

tab.

User's Manual

127

Figure 5-37 Pattern

Step 3 In the

Pattern

box, enter the value for pattern.

Step 4 Click

Start

to perform the directions operations. You can also go to the PTZ Control Panel

to perform the operations of adjusting zoom, focus, iris, and directions.

Step 5 On the

PTZ

window, click

End

to complete the settings.

5.6.7.3.4 Configuring AutoScan

Procedure

Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, click .

Step 2 Click the

Scan

tab.

Figure 5-38 Scan

Step 3 Click the direction arrows to position the left and right limits.

User's Manual

128

5.6.7.4 Using PTZ Functions

After you have configured the PTZ settings, you can use the PTZ functions from the expanded PTZ

control panel.

Figure 5-39 Expanded PTZ control panel

5.6.7.4.1 Presets

Procedure

Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, in the

No.

box, enter the value of the preset.

Step 2 Click to call the preset.

Step 3 Click again to stop calling the preset.

5.6.7.4.2 Tours

Procedure

Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, in the

No.

box, enter the value of the tour.

Step 2 Click to call the tour.

Step 3 Click again to stop calling the tour.

5.6.7.4.3 Patterns

Procedure

Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, in the

No.

box, enter the value of the pattern.

Step 2 Click to call the pattern.

The PTZ camera moves according to the configured pattern repeatedly.

Step 3 Click again to stop calling the pattern.

5.6.7.4.4 AutoScan

Procedure

Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, in the

No.

box, enter the value of the border.

Step 2 Click .

The PTZ camera performs scanning according to the configured borders.

Step 3 Click again to stop auto scanning.

5.6.7.4.5 Calling AutoPan

Procedure

User's Manual

129

Step 1 On the expanded PTZ control panel, click to start moving in horizontal direction.

Step 2 Click again to stop moving.

5.6.7.4.6 Auxiliary Button

On the expanded PTZ control panel, click .

In the

Shortcut Aux

list, select the option that corresponds to the applied protocol.

In the

Aux No.

box, enter the number that corresponds to the AUX switch on the decoder.

Figure 5-40 Auxiliary

5.6.8 Wireless Pairing

You can use the wireless pairing to quickly add IPCs to the NVR.

Make sure that the IPC and NVR are on the same network segment.

Right-click the live page, and then select

Wireless Pairing

. The system starts a 120-second pairing

countdown. You can see the video of the paired IPC after pairing is successful.

User's Manual

130

Figure 5-41 Wireless pairing

5.6.9 Sequence

You can configure the sequence of the channels displayed on the live page.

Procedure

Step 1 Right-click the live page, and then select

Sequence

●

After you select

Sequence

, the system automatically switches to the max split amount

mode.

●

The channel list on the

Sequence

panel displays the added camera channel number

and channel name. means camera is online. means camera is offline.

User's Manual

131

Figure 5-42 Sequence

Step 2 On the

Sequence

panel, drag the channel to the desired window, or drag on the live

window to switch the position.

Check the channel number at the right bottom corner to view the current channel

sequence.

User's Manual

132

Figure 5-43 Channel number

Step 3 Click

Apply

After you change the channel sequence, click

Cancel

or right-click the live view page, the

system prompts you whether to save the sequence change.

●

Click

to save current settings.

●

Click

to exit without saving the settings.

Figure 5-44 Note for saving sequence

User's Manual

133

5.6.10 Fisheye

This function is for some models only.

5.6.10.1 Fisheye De-warp on Live View Interface

The fisheye camera (panoramic camera) has wide video of angle but its video is seriously distorted.

The de-warp function can present the proper and vivid video suitable for human eyes.

On the live page, right-click the fisheye channel, and then select

Fisheye

. You can set fisheye

installation mode and display mode.

●

For the non-fish eye channel, the system prompts you it is not a fisheye channel and does not

support de-warp function.

●

If system resources are insufficient, the system prompts you the de-warp function is not available.

Figure 5-45 Fisheye

There are three installation modes: ceiling mount, wall mount, and ground mount.

●

The different installations modes have different de-warp modes.

●

Some models support de-warp of 180° fisheye camera. 180° fisheye camera supports de-warp in

wall mount mode only.

User's Manual

134

Figure 5-46 Fisheye settings

Table 5-14 Installation mode

Installation mode Icon Description

(Ceiling mount)

(Ground mount)

360° panorama original view

1 de-warp window+1 panorama stretching

2 panorama stretching views

1 360° panorama view+3 de-warp windows

1 360°panorama view+4 de-warp windows

4 de-warp windows+1 panorama stretching

1 360° panorama view+8 de-warp windows

(Wall mount)

360°panorama original view

Panorama stretching

1 panorama unfolding view+3 de-warp

windows

1 panorama unfolding view +4 de warp

windows

1 panorama unfolding view +8 de warp

windows

User's Manual

135

Figure 5-47 De-warp

You can adjust the color pane on the left pane or use your mouse to change the position of the small

images on the right pane to realize fish eye de-warp.

Operation: Use mouse to zoom in, zoom out, move, and rotate the image (Not for wall mount mode.)

5.6.10.2 Fisheye De-warp During Playback

When playing back the fisheye record file, you can use de-warp function to adjust video.

Step 1 On the main menu, click

BACKUP

Step 2 Select 1-window playback mode and corresponding fish eye channel, click to play.

Step 3 Right-click , and then you can go to the de-warp playback page. For detailed

information, see Figure 5-47.

5.6.11 Temperature Monitoring

When NVR connects to the camera that supports temperature detection, the system can display

instant temperature.

●

This function might collect the human temperature in the surveillance video.

●

This function is available on select models.

Step 1 Go to

Main Menu

DISPLAY

Display

to enable the temperature test function.

Step 2 On the live page, click any position on the thermal channel video. The temperature at the

position is displayed.

User's Manual

136

Figure 5-48 Temperature display

5.6.12 Shortcut Menu to Add Camera

You can add cameras on the live page.

Procedure

Step 1 On the live page, point to a channel window.

There is an icon + on the channel window.

Figure 5-49 Add icon

Step 2 Click "+", and then configure the parameters to add the remote device. For details, see

"5.7.2 Adding Remote Devices".

User's Manual

137

5.6.13 Smart Tracking

Track targets manually or automatically. This function is only available on the multi-sensor

panoramic camera + PTZ camera.

Make sure that the linked tracking function has been enabled.

Step 1 Right-click the live video, and then select

Smart Tracking

Step 2 Select the tracking method.

●

Manual positioning: Click a spot or select a zone on the bullet camera video, and then

the PTZ camera will automatically rotates there and zoom in.

●

Manual tracking: Click or select a target on the bullet camera video, and then the PTZ

camera automatically rotates and tracks it.

●

Automatic tracking: The tracking action is automatically triggered by tripwire or

intrusion alarms according to the pre-defined rules.

5.7 Camera

5.7.1 Initializing Remote Devices

You can change the login password and IP address of a remote device when you initialize it.

●

When you connect a camera to the NVR via PoE port, NVR automatically initializes the camera.

The camera adopts NVR current password and email information by default.

●

When you connect a camera to the NVR via PoE port after NVR is upgraded to the new version,

the NVR might fail to initialize the camera. You need to initialize the camera manually.

Step 1 Log in to the local system of the Device.

Step 2 Right-click the live page and then select

Main Menu

CAMERA

Camera List

Camera

List

Step 3 Click

Uninitialized

, and then click

Search Device

The Device displays cameras to be initialized.

Step 4 Select a camera to be initialized and then click

Initialize

User's Manual

138

Figure 5-50 Enter password

Step 5 Set password and email information for the remote device.

If you select

Using current device password and email info

, the remote device

automatically uses NVR admin account information (login password and email). You can

skip this step.

1) Cancel the selection of

Using current device password and email info

Figure 5-51 Password

User's Manual

139

2) Enter the password and then confirm it.

For your device security, we recommend you create a strong password according to the

password strength indication and change your password regularly.

3) Click

Figure 5-52 Password protection

4) Enter your email address, and then click

The email address is used to receive the security code for password resetting.

If you do not want to enter email information, cancel the selection of the checkbox and

then click

Skip

Step 6 Set camera IP address.

●

DHCP

: There is no need to enter IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway. Device

automatically allocates the IP address to the camera.

●

Static

: You need to enter IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.

●

When you are changing IP addresses of several devices at the same time, enter

incremental value. The system can add the fourth decimal digit of the IP address one by

one to automatically allocate the IP addresses.

●

If an IP conflict occurs when you change static IP address, the system will notify you of

the issue. If you change IP addresses in batches, the system automatically skips the

conflicted IP and begins the allocation according to the incremental value.

User's Manual

140

Figure 5-53 Modify IP

Step 7 Click

Figure 5-54 Device initialization

Step 8 Click

Finished

5.7.2 Adding Remote Devices

Add remote devices to the NVR to receive, store, and manage the video streams of the remote

User's Manual

141

device.

Before adding the remote devices, make sure that the devices have been initialized.

5.7.2.1 Adding Cameras from Search

Search for the remote devices that are on the same network with the NVR, and then add the remote

devices from the search results.

We recommend this method when you do not know the specific IP address of the remote device.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

CAMERA

Camera List

Step 2 Click

Search Device

The remote devices found are displayed at the upper pane. Devices already added are not

included in the searched results.

Figure 5-55 Search device

●

For cameras accessed through private protocol, you can click

LIVE

and then enter the

username and password to play live video.

●

To filter the remote devices, you can enter all or part of device name in the

Filter

box.

●

To filter out the uninitialized devices, click the

Not Initialized

tab, and then you can

initialize the devices. For details, see "5.7.1 Initializing Remote Devices".

User's Manual

142

●

To view all remote devices added through plug and play, you can click the

Not Auto

Connected

tab. You can remove devices added through plug and play, and they can

be automatically added again after plug and play is enabled.

Step 3 (Optional) Enable

Plug and Play

When

Plug and Play

is enabled, the NVR automatically adds remote devices on the same

subnet.

For uninitialized remote devices, the NVR automatically initializes them before adding

them.

Step 4 (Optional) Enable

H.265 Auto Switch

When

H.265 Auto Switch

is enabled, the video compression standard of added remote

devices is switched to H.265 automatically.

Step 5 Double-click a remote device, or select a remote device and then click

Add

to register it to

the

Added Device

list.

Related Operations

●

Change camera login password.

Select an added camera, and then click

Change Camera Login Password

to change the

password.

●

Edit camera information.

On the

Added Device

list, click to change the IP address, username, password and other

information.

●

Import and export cameras.

You can export the information of the connected cameras and import camera information to the

system to add cameras in batches. For details, see "5.7.2.3 Importing Cameras".

●

View linked information.

If the remote device has multiple channels, you can click the

Camera Linked Info

to view linked

information of the remote device.

●

Delete cameras.

◇

Delete one by one.

Click to delete the corresponding camera.

◇

Delete in batches.

Select one or more cameras, and then click

Delete

5.7.2.2 Adding Cameras Manually

Configure the IP address, username, password and other information of the remote device manually

to add to the NVR.

We recommend this method when you want to add only a few remote devices and know their IP

addresses, usernames and passwords.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

CAMERA

Camera List

User's Manual

143

Step 2 (Optional) Enable

H.265 Auto Switch

When

H.265 Auto Switch

is enabled, the video compression standard of added remote

devices is switched to H.265 automatically.

Step 3 Click

Manual Add

Figure 5-56 Manual add

Step 4 Configure the parameters.

The parameters might vary depending on the manufacturer that you select.

Table 5-15 Remote channel parameters

Parameter Description

Channel

Select the channel that you want use on the Device to connect the

remote device.

Manufacturer Select the manufacturer of the remote device.

IP Address Enter the IP address of the remote device.

RTSP Port Enter the RTSP port number. The default value is 554.

HTTP Port Enter the HTTP port number. The default value is 80.

TCP Port The default value is 37777. You can enter the value as needed.

Username Enter the username of the remote device.

Password Enter the password of the user for the remote device.

Total Channels

Click

Connect

to get the total number of channels of the remote

device.

Remote CH No. Enter the remote channel number of the remote device.

User's Manual

144

Parameter Description

Decode Strategy

Select

Default

Realtime

, or

Fluent

Protocol Type

●

If the remote device is added through private protocol, the

default type is

TCP

●

If the remote device is added through ONVIF protocol, the

system supports

Auto

TCP

UDP

, or

MULTICAST

●

If the remote device is added through other manufacturers,

the system supports

TCP

and

UDP

Encryption

If the remote device is added through ONVIF protocol, select the

Encrypt

checkbox and then the system will provide encryption

protection to the data being transmitted.

To use this function, make sure that the HTTPS function is enabled

for the remote IP camera.

Step 5 Click

5.7.2.3 Importing Cameras

You can import remote devices in batches.

We recommend this method when you want to add lots of remote devices whose IP addresses,

usernames and passwords are not the same.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

CAMERA

Camera List

Step 2 Export the template.

The exported template includes the information of the added remote device. Pay attention

to your data security.

1) Click

Export

Figure 5-57 Backup encryption

2) Cancel the selection of the

checkbox to disable backup encryption, and then click

●

Backup Encryption

is enabled, the file format is .backup.

●

Backup Encryption

is disabled, the file format is .csv. Keep unencrypted files well

to avoid data leakage.

User's Manual

145

3) Select the storage path and then click

Save

●

The template file is named RemoteConfig_

20220222191255

.csv.

20220222191255

represents the export time.

●

The template includes the IP address, port, remote channel No., manufacturer,

username, password and other information.

Step 3 Fill in the template and then save the file.

Do not change the file extension of the template. Otherwise, the template cannot be

imported.

Step 4 Click

Import

, select the template file and then open it.

The remote devices in the template are added to the NVR. If the remote device in the

template has been added, the system will prompt you whether to replace the existing one

on the device list.

●

If you select

Yes

, the system deletes the existing one and import the device again.

●

If you select

, the system retains the existing one and add the device to another

unoccupied channel.

5.7.3 Changing IP Address of Remote Device

The procedures to change the IP addresses of connected and unconnected cameras are different.

You can change the IP address only when the camera is online.

5.7.3.1 Changing IP Address of Connected Remote Device

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

CAMERA

Camera List

Step 2 On the

Added Device

list, double-click a remote device or click .

Step 3 Change the IP address.

Step 4 Click

5.7.3.2 Changing IP Address of Unconnected Cameras

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

CAMERA

Camera List

Step 2 Click

Search Device

The remote devices found are displayed at the upper pane.

Step 3 Click , or select one or more remote devices and then click

Modify IP

When changing the IP addresses of multiple remote devices at the same time, make sure

that they share the same username and password.

Step 4 Enter username and password of the remote device, and then configure the IP address.

●

DHCP

: The remote device gets a dynamic IP address automatically.

●

Static

: You need to enter static IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway. When

changing IP addresses of multiple remote devices at the same time. enter the

User's Manual

146

incremental value so that the system can add the fourth decimal digit of the IP address

one by one according to the incremental value.

Step 5 Click

5.7.4 Configuring Image Settings

You can set network camera parameters according to different environments to get the best video

effect.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

CAMERA

Image

Figure 5-58 Image

Step 2 Select a channel and then configure parameters.

The parameters might vary depending on the camera model.

Table 5-16 Image parameters

Parameter Description

Profile

There are three configuration files. The system has configured the

corresponding parameters for each file. You can select according to

your actual situation.

User's Manual

147

Parameter Description

Brightness

Adjust the image brightness. The bigger the value is, the brighter the

image will become.

Contrast

Adjust the image contrast. The bigger the value is, the more obvious

the contrast between the light area and dark area will become.

Saturation

Adjust the color shades. The bigger the value, the lighter the color will

become.

Sharpness

Adjust the sharpness of image edge. The bigger the value is, the more

obvious the image edge is.

Gamma

Adjust image brightness and enhance the image dynamic display

range. The bigger the value is, the brighter the video is.

Mirror

Switch the left and right sides of the video image. It is disabled by

default.

This function is available on select models.

Flip Set video display direction. It includes normal, 180°, 90°, and 270°.

AI SSA

After you enable AI SSA (AI Scene Self-adaptation), the camera can

detect environmental conditions, such as rain, fog, backlight, low light

and flicker, to adjust the parameters of the image to suit the

conditions, ensuring that clear images are always produced.

When AI SSA is enabled, some image parameters such as exposure

and backlight mode will become unavailable.

Exposure

Auto Iris

●

This function is available when the camera is

equipped with the auto iris lens.

●

After you enable auto iris function, the iris can

automatically zoom in and zoom out according

to the brightness of the environment and the

image brightness changes accordingly.

●

If you disable the auto iris function, the iris is at

the biggest value. The iris does not

automatically zoom in or zoom out according

to the brightness of the environment.

3D NR

This function specially applies to the image whose

frame rate is configured as 2 at least. It reduces the

noise by using the information between two

frames. The bigger the value is, the better the

effect.

User's Manual

148

Parameter Description

Backlight Mode

You can set camera backlight mode.

●

SSA: In the backlight environment, the system can automatically

adjust image brightness to clearly display the object.

●

BLC:

◇

Default: The device performs automatic exposures according

to the environment situation to make the darkest area of the

video clear.

◇

Customize: After you select the specified zone, the system can

expose the specific zone so that the zone can reach the proper

brightness.

●

WDR: In backlight environment, the system lowers the high bright

section and enhances the brightness of the low bright section, so

that you can view these two sections clearly at the same time.

●

HLC: In the backlight environment, the system lowers the

brightness of the brightest section, reduces the area of the halo

and lowers the brightness of the whole video.

●

Close: Disable the BLC function.

WB Mode

You can set camera white balance mode. The system adjusts the

overall image hue to make the image color display precisely as it is.

Different cameras support different white balance modes, such as

auto, manual, natural light, and outdoor.

Day/Night Mode

Configure the color and black & white mode of the image. This

parameter is not affected by the configuration files.

●

Color

: The camera outputs color image only.

●

Auto

: The camera outputs color images or black and white images

according to ambient brightness

●

B/W

: The camera outputs black and white image only.

●

Sensor

: Use this mode when there is peripheral IR light

connected.

The

Sensor

mode is available on select non-IR models.

Step 3 Click

Apply

5.7.5 Configuring Overlay Settings

You can set parameters for overlay and private masking.

5.7.5.1 Overlay

You can add the information of time and channel in the live view interface.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

CAMERA

Overlay

User's Manual

149

Step 2 Select a channel and then configure parameters.

Table 5-17 Video overlay parameters

Parameter Description

Time Title

Display the time tile on the video image in live view and playback.

1. Select

Time Title

2. Drag the time title to a desired place.

3. Click

Apply

Channel Title

Display the channel tile on the video image in live view and

playback.

1. Select

Channel Title

and then edit the channel title.

2. Drag the channel title to a desired place.

3. Click

Apply

Custom Title

You can customize title to be overlaid on the video image.

Click

Setting

to set the information such as font size, title content

and text alignment, and then click

Default Restore the overlay settings to default configuration.

Copy to Copy the overlay settings to other channels.

Step 3 Click

Apply

5.7.5.2 Privacy Masking

You can mask certain areas of the video image for privacy protection.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

CAMERA

Overlay

Privacy Masking

Figure 5-59 Privacy masking

Step 2 Select a channel.

Step 3 Click to enable privacy masking.

User's Manual

150

Step 4 Click

Add

, select the masking type and color, and then draw mosaic or color blocks in the

image as needed.

A masking block appears on the video image.

●

The number of masking blocks that you can add might differ depending on the camera.

You can add up to 24 masking blocks.

●

Click

Clear

to delete all masking areas. Click to delete a masking area.

Step 5 Drag the masking block to a desired position and then configure the type, color and other

parameters.

Step 6 Click

Apply

5.7.6 Configuring Encoding Settings

You can set video bit stream and image parameters.

5.7.6.1 Configuring Audio and Video Encoding Settings

You can set audio and video encoding parameters such as bit stream type, compression, and

resolution.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

CAMERA

Encode

Audio/Video

Figure 5-60 Audio/video

Step 2 Select a channel and then configure parameters.

The parameters for main stream and sub stream are different. Some models support three

streams: main stream, sub stream 1, sub stream 2.

User's Manual

151

Table 5-18 Audio/video parameters

Parameter Description

Coding Strategy

●

General

: Use general coding strategy.

●

Smart Codec

: Enable the smart codec function. This function can

reduce the video bit stream for non-important recorded video to

maximize the storage space.

●

AI Codec

: Enable the AI codec function. This function can reduce

the camera code stream, network transmission pressure, and hard

drive storage space without affecting the image quality.

Type

Select the recording type for main stream from

General

Motion

(motion detection), or

Alarm

Compression

Select the encoding mode.

●

H.265: Main profile encoding. This setting is recommended.

●

H.264H: High profile encoding. Low bit stream with high definition.

●

H.264: Main profile encoding.

●

H.264B: Baseline profile encoding. This mode requires higher bit

stream compared with other modes for the same definition.

Resolution

Select resolution for the video.

The maximum video resolution might be different depending on your

device model.

Frame Rate (FPS)

Configure the frames per second for the video. The higher the value is,

the clearer and smoother the image will become. Frame rate changes

along with the resolution.

Generally, in PAL format, you can select the value from 1 through 25; in

NTSC format, you can select the value from 1 through 30. However, the

actual range of frame rate that you can select depends on the

capability of the Device.

Bit Rate Type

●

CBR

(constant bit rate): The bit rate changes slightly around the

defined value. We recommended selecting

CBR

when there might

be only small changes in the monitoring environment.

●

VBR

(variable bit rate): The bit rate changes with monitoring

scenes. Select variable stream when there might be big changes in

the monitoring environment.

Quality

The bigger the value is, the better the image will become.

This parameter is available if you select

VBR

Bit Rate Type

I Frame Interval The interval between two reference frames.

Bit Rate (Kb/S)

●

Main stream: The higher the value, the better the image quality.

●

Sub stream: For constant stream, the bit rate changes near the

defined value; for variable stream, the bit rate changes along with

the image but the maximum value still stays near the defined

value.

Step 3 Click

User's Manual

152

Figure 5-61 More settings

Step 4 Configure audio compression parameters.

Table 5-19 Audio compression parameters

Parameter Description

Audio

This function is enabled by default for main stream. You need to manually

enable it for sub stream. Once this function is enabled, the recorded

video file is composite audio and video stream.

Compression Select an audio compression format.

Sampling Frequency

Set how many times per second a sound is sampled. The bigger the value,

the more natural the sound.

Step 5 Click

Step 6 Click

Apply

5.7.6.2 Snapshot

You can set snapshot mode, image size, quality and interval.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

CAMERA

Encode

Snapshot

User's Manual

153

Figure 5-62 Snapshot

Step 2 Configure parameters.

Table 5-20 Snapshot parameters

Parameter Description

Manual Snapshot Select the number of snapshots that you want to take each time.

Channel Select the channel that you want to configure the settings for.

Type

●

Scheduled

: The snapshot is taken during the scheduled period.

●

Event

: The snapshot is taken for motion detection, video loss, local

alarms and other events.

Size

The size is determined by the resolution of the main stream or sub

stream of the channel.

Quality

Configure the image quality. The higher the level is, the better the image

will become. Level 6 represents the best quality.

Interval Select or customize how frequently snapshots are to be taken.

Step 3 Click

Apply

5.7.7 Modifying Channel Name

You can customize channel name.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

CAMERA

Camera Name

User's Manual

154

Figure 5-63 Camera name

Step 2 Modify a channel name.

●

You can only change the name of the camera connected via the private protocol.

●

You can enter up to 63 English characters for a channel name.

Step 3 Click

Apply

5.7.8 Checking the PoE Status

You can check the status of PoE ports and set enhancement mode for each PoE port.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

CAMERA

PoE

User's Manual

155

Figure 5-64 PoE

Step 2 (Optional) Set

Enhancement Mode

Off

When enhancement mode is enabled, the transmission distance of the PoE port will be

extended.

5.7.9 Updating Remote Devices

You can update the firmware of the connected network camera through online update or file

update.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

CAMERA

Camera List

Update

User's Manual

156

Figure 5-65 Update

Step 2 Update the firmware of the connected remote device.

●

Online update.

1. Select a remote device and then click

Manual Check

The system checks for available updates.

2. Select a remote device that has an update available for it, and then click

Online

Update

●

File update.

1. Select a channel and then click

File Update

2. Select an update file.

3. Click

If there are too many remote devices, you can filter them on the

Device Type

list.

5.7.10 Viewing Remote Device Information

5.7.10.1 Device Status

You can view the connection and alarm status of the corresponding channel.

Select

Main Menu

CAMERA

Camera List

Device Status

User's Manual

157

Figure 5-66 Device status

Table 5-21 Parameters of device status

Icon Description Icon Description

IPC works properly.

IPC is not supported.

Alarm.

Video loss.

5.7.10.2 Firmware

You can view the IP address, manufacturer, type, and system version of the connected remote

device.

Select

Main Menu

CAMERA

Camera List

Firmware

User's Manual

158

Figure 5-67 Firmware

5.8 Recording Management

5.8.1 Recording Schedule

After you set the recording schedule for videos and snapshots, the Device can automatically record

videos and snapshots at the scheduled time.

5.8.1.1 Configuring Video Recording Schedule

After you set the schedule for videos, the Device will record videos according to the period you set.

For example, if the alarm recording period is from 6:00–18:00 on Monday, the Device will make a

recording on Mondays from 6:00-18:00.

Step 1 Right-click the live page, and then select

Main Menu

STORAGE

Schedule

Record

User's Manual

159

Figure 5-68 Video schedule

Step 2 Configure the parameters.

Table 5-22 Video schedule parameters

Parameter Description

Channel Select a channel to record a video.

Pre-record

Enter the amount of time that you want the pre-recording to last. A

recording will be made prior to the event.

Redundancy

If there are several HDDs installed to the Device, you can set one of

the HDDs as the redundant HDD to save the recorded files into

different HDDs. If one of the HDDs becomes damaged, you can find

the backup on the other HDD.

●

Select

Main Menu

STORAGE

Disk Manager

, and then set a

HDD as redundant HDD.

●

Select

Main Menu

STORAGE

Schedule

Record

, and then

select the

Redundancy

checkbox.

◇

If the selected channel is not recording, the redundancy

function will take effect the next time that you record,

whether or not you select the checkbox.

◇

If the selected channel is recording, the current recorded files

will be packed, and then start recording according to the new

schedule.

●

This function is for some models only.

●

The redundant HDD only backs up the recorded videos but not

snapshots.

User's Manual

160

Parameter Description

ANR

You can set the ANR (auto network resume) function.

●

The IPC continues recording once the NVR and IPC connection

fails. After the network becomes normal, the NVR can download

recording files while it is disconnected from the IPC. This is to help

protect against data loss from the current IPD channel that is

connected.

●

Set the maximum recording upload period. If the offline period is

longer than the period you set, IPC will only upload the recording

file during the specified period.

Make sure that SD card is installed and the recording function is

enabled on the IPC.

Period

Set a period during which the configured recording setting is active.

The system only activates the alarm in the defined period.

Copy to

Click

Copy to

to copy the settings to other channels.

Figure 5-69 Period

Step 3 Set one or more recording types from

General

Motion

(motion detection),

Alarm

M&A

(motion detection and alarm),

Intelligent

and

Alarm

Figure 5-70 Recording type

Step 4 Set recording period.

If you have added a holiday, you can set the recording period for the holiday.

User's Manual

161

Figure 5-71 Set record period

●

Define the period by drawing.

1. Select a corresponding date to set.

◇

Define for the whole week: Click next to

All

. All the icon switch to . You

can define the period for all the days simultaneously.

◇

Define for several days of a week: Click before each day one by one. The

icon switches to . You can define the period for the selected days

simultaneously.

2. On the timeline, drag to define a period.

◇

Once the time period overlaps, the recording priority is:

M&A

Alarm

POS

Intelligent

Motion

General

◇

Select a recording type and then click the of the corresponding date to clear

the corresponding period.

Figure 5-72 Set period by drawing

User's Manual

162

The MD record and alarm record function are both null if you enabled

MD&Alarm function.

●

Define the period by editing.

1. Select a date and then click .

Figure 5-73 Set period by editing

2. Set the recording type for each period.

◇

There are six periods for you to set for each day.

◇

Under

Copy to

, select

All

to apply the settings to all the days of the week, or

select specific days that you want to apply the settings to.

3. Click

Apply

Step 5 Click

Apply

to complete the settings.

5.8.1.2 Configuring Snapshot Schedule

Configure recording schedule for snapshots.

Step 1 Right-click the live page, and then select

Main Menu

STORAGE

Schedule

Snapshot

User's Manual

163

Figure 5-74 Snapshot

Step 2 Select a channel to set schedule snapshot.

Step 3 Set a recording type.

Figure 5-75 Recording type

Step 4 Set snapshot period. For details, see Step4 in "5.8.1.1 Configuring Video Recording

Schedule".

Step 5 Click

Apply

5.8.1.3 Configuring Recording Mode

After you set schedule record or schedule snapshot, you need to enable the auto record and

snapshot function so that the system can automatically record or take snapshot.

●

Auto: The system automatically records the videos and snapshots according to the defined

schedule.

●

Manual: The system records general files for the entire day.

You need to have storage authorities to use the

Manual

recording mode.

Step 1 Right-click the live page, and then select

Main Menu

STORAGE

Record

User's Manual

164

Figure 5-76 Recording mode

Step 2 Configure parameters.

Table 5-23 Recording mode parameters

Parameter Description

Channel

Displays all the connected channels. You can select a single channel or

select

All

Recording status

●

Auto: Automatically make recordings according to the schedule.

●

Manual: Makes a general recording within 24 hours for the selected

channel.

●

Off: Do not record.

Snapshot status

Enable or disable the scheduled snapshot for the corresponding

channels.

Step 3 Click

Apply

5.8.2 Search and Playback

5.8.2.1 Search Page

You can search for and play back the recorded files on the NVR.

Select

Main Menu

, or right-click on the live view page and then select

The following figure is for reference only.

User's Manual

165

Figure 5-77 Search

Table 5-24 Search page description

No. Function Description

1 Display window

Display the searched recorded video or picture. The system

supports playing in single-channel, 4-channel, 9-channel,

and 16-channel simultaneously.

When playing back in the single-channel mode, hold down

the left mouse button to select the area that you want to

enlarge. The area is enlarged after the left mouse button is

released. To exit the enlarged status, right-click the image.

Playback controls bar Playback control buttons.

Clip

Click to clip the recording file and then save the

footage. See "5.8.2.4 Clipping Videos" for details.

Backup Click to back up recordings.

User's Manual

166

No. Function Description

3 Time bar

Display the type and time period of the current recorded

video.

●

In the 4-channel layout, 4 time bars are displayed. In

other view layouts, only 1 time bar is displayed.

●

Click the colored area to start playback from a certain

time.

●

When you are configuring the settings, rotate the wheel

button on the time bar to zoom in from 0. When a

playback is being played, rotate the wheel button on the

time bar, the time bar will zoom into the time point

where the playback is located.

●

Time bar colors: Green for general type; red for external

alarm; yellow for motion detection; blue for intelligent

events; purple for POS events.

●

Click and hold the time bar, and the mouse pointer

changes to a hand icon, and then you can drag to view

the playback of the target time.

●

You can drag the vertical orange line on the time bar to

rapidly view the playback in iframe format.

●

When playing back a video in one channel mode, point

to the time bar for 0.1 seconds, and then you can view 4

pictures before and after the selected time, and the

thumbnail picture of the selected time.

●

For some models, when you click the blank area in the

time bar, the system automatically jumps to the next

time point where there is a recorded video located.

Play status

Includes 2 playback status:

Play

and

Stop

Record type

Select the checkbox to define the recording type to search

for.

5 Search type

Select the content to play back:

Record

Picture

, and

Subperiod

6 Calendar

Click the date that you want to search for.

The dates with recordings or snapshots have a small solid

circle under the date.

User's Manual

167

No. Function Description

View layout and

channel selection

●

In the

Camera Name

list, select one or more channels

that you want to play back.

●

The window split is decided by how you select the

channels. For example, if you select 1 channel, the

playback is displayed in the single-channel view. If you

select two to four channels, the playback is displayed in

the four-channel view. The maximum is eight channels.

●

Click to switch the streams. indicates main

stream, and indicates sub stream.

8 List display

This area includes

Tag List

and

File List

The icons displayed might vary with models.

●

: Click

Tag List

to view the marked recorded video

list. Double-click the file to start playing.

●

: Click

File List

to view the files that were found. You

can lock and unlock the files. See"5.8.2.6 File List" for

detailed information.

●

: fisheye dewarp. See "5.6.10.2 Fisheye De-warp

During Playback " for detailed information.

9 Time bar unit

You can select 24 hr, 2 hr, 1 hr, or 30 min as the unit of time

bar.

All the operations for playback might vary with hardware versions. Some functions are available on

select models.

5.8.2.2 Playback

You can search for and play back videos, images or video clips. The operations are similar. This

section uses video playback as an example.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

, or right-click the live page and then select

Step 2 Select

From R/W Disk

From I/O Device

●

From R/W Disk: Search for recorded files on the HDD of the Device.

Figure 5-78 Search from R/W disk

●

From I/O Device: Search for recorded files from external storage device.

Click

Browse

, select the storage path of the recorded video file that you want to play.

Double-click the video file or click to start playing.

User's Manual

168

Figure 5-79 Search from I/O device

Step 3 Select

Record

as the search type.

Step 4 Select the date, and channel.

Step 5 Click or any position on the time bar.

The system starts playback. You can use the playback controls to control the playback

process.

Figure 5-80 Playback control

Table 5-25 Playback control description

Icon Function

Play/Pause

In slow play mode, click it to switch between play/pause.

Stop

When playing back, click to stop current playback process.

Rewind

In normal play mode, left-click the button, the file begins to rewind. Click it

again to pause it.

While it is rewinding, click or to restore normal play.

Display previous frame/next frame.

When you pause the normal playback file, click or to play back

frame by frame.

In frame by frame playback mode, click or to resume normal

playback mode.

Slow play

In playback mode, click it to use various slow play modes such as slow play 1,

slow play 2, and more.

Fast forward

In playback mode, click to realize various fast play modes such as fast play

1,fast play 2 and more.

Adjust the volume of the playback.

Smart search.

See "5.8.2.3 Smart Search Playback" for detailed information.

User's Manual

169

Icon Function

Smart motion detection. You can click the icon to select a human or motor

vehicle, and the system plays detected videos of the person or motor vehicle.

Human and motor vehicle can be selected at the same time.

Click the snapshot button in the full-screen mode to take one snapshot.

System supports custom snap picture saved path. Connect the peripheral

device first, click snap button on the full-screen mode, you can select or create

a path. Click Start button, the snapshot picture can be saved to the specified

path.

Mark button.

This function is available on select models. Make sure there is a mark button in

the playback control pane.

See "5.8.2.7 Tag Playback" for detailed information.

Display and hide POS information.

In 1-channel playback mode, you can click it to display/hide POS information

on the video.

In 1-channel playback mode, click it to enable or disable display IVS rule

information on the video.

This function is for some series only.

Picture search. For details, see "5.6.3.7 Picture Search".

Quick pick. For details, see "5.6.3.8 Quick Pick".

5.8.2.3 Smart Search Playback

This function is for some models only.

During the playback process, the system can analyze the motion detection zone in the scene and

give the analysis result.

Make sure that motion detection has been enabled in

Main Menu

ALARM

Video Detection

Motion Detection

Step 1 Select a channel to playback video and then click . You can view the grids on the

playback video.

●

This function is for one-channel playback mode.

●

In multiple-channel playback mode, double-click a channel to switch to one-channel

playback mode.

Step 2 Select smart search zones (22*18(PAL), 22*15(NTSC)).

Step 3 Click to go to smart search and playback. The system is going to play back all motion

detection record footage.

User's Manual

170

Step 4 Click again to stop smart search.

●

The motion detection region cannot be the full screen zone.

●

The motion detection region adopts the current whole play pane by default.

●

The time bar unit switch, rewinding, frame by frame are not available when the system

is playing a motion detection file.

5.8.2.4 Clipping Videos

You can clip some footage from recorded videos to a new file and then save to the USB device.

Step 1 Select a record first and then click to play back.

Step 2 Select a time on the time bar and then click to start clip.

Step 3 Select a time on the time bar and then click to stop clip.

Step 4 Click , the system pops up dialogue box to save the clip file.

Figure 5-81 Clip

5.8.2.5 Backing Up

You can back up recorded videos, images, or video clips to a USB storage device.

Step 1 Select the files that you want to back up.

●

Videos or images. Click at the lower-right corner of the search page, and then on

the file list, select the files for backup.

●

Video clips. See "5.8.2.4 Clipping Videos".

Step 2 Click .

User's Manual

171

Figure 5-82 Backup

Step 3 Select the storage device, and then click

Backup

●

You can cancel the selection of the files that you do not want to back up.

●

Select

Combine Video

to merge several videos into one.

5.8.2.6 File List

On the search page, select a channel, and then click to view the file list. On the file list, you can

manage the files of the selected channel.

●

Play.

Double-click a file to play.

●

Search.

Select a specific time and then click .

●

Lock or unlock files.

◇

To lock files, on the file list, select one or more files, and then click . The locked files will

not be overwritten.

◇

To unlock files, click . and then select one or more files and then click

Unlock

●

Go back to the previous page.

Click to return to the page with calendar.

5.8.2.7 Tag Playback

When you are playing back a video, you can add a tag to mark an important point in time on the

video. After playback, you can use time or the tag keywords to search for the corresponding video

and then play.

User's Manual

172

Adding Tag

When the system is playing back, click , and then configure the tag name.

Playing back Tag

During single-channel playback, click , and then on the tag list, double-click a file to play back.

To search for tagged videos by time, select the tag time and then click .

Playing before Tagged Time

You can choose to play back from the previous N seconds of the tag time.

The system can play back previous N seconds before the tagged time if there is a video at that point.

Otherwise, the system plays back as much as there is.

Managing Tags

On the tag list, click .

Figure 5-83 Tag management

●

To search for the tagged video, select channel number, start time and end time, and then click

●

To change the tag name, double-click a tagged video, and then enter the new name.

●

To delete tags, select one or more tagged videos, and then click

Delete

User's Manual

173

5.8.3 Recording Information

Select

Main Menu

MAINTAIN

System Info

to view the recording information.

Figure 5-84 Recording information

5.9 AI

AI detection is to process and analyze the image and extract the key information, and then compare

the key information with the preset detection rule. An alarm is triggered when the detected

behavior matches the detection rule.

The following figures are for reference only and might differ from the actual situation.

5.9.1 Overview

AI detection falls into AI by camera and AI by recorder.

●

AI by camera: Some cameras themselves support AI detection. The cameras perform AI detection

and send the detection results to the NVR for display. When using AI by camera, make sure to

connect the Device to the cameras that support the corresponding AI detection functions.

●

AI by recorder: The cameras send videos to NVR for detection, analysis and result display.

●

Some models support AI by camera only.

●

The AI functions might vary with models.

●

Different AI functions might conflict with each other. You cannot enable two conflicting AI

functions for the same channel.

User's Manual

174

5.9.2 Smart Plan

To use AI by camera for face detection, face recognition and other detection functions, you need to

enable the corresponding smart plan first.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

Smart Plan

Step 2 Select a channel.

The page might differ depending on which smart plans that the remote device supports.

Figure 5-85 Smart plan

Step 3 Click the icon that represents the smart plan to enable it. The icon becomes highlighted.

If the channel is connected to a PTZ camera, you can set smart plans separately for each

preset point.

User's Manual

175

Figure 5-86 Smart plan (PTZ)

Step 4 Click

Apply

5.9.3 Face Detection

The Device can detect faces on the video image.

5.9.3.1 Enabling Smart Plan

To use AI by camera, you need to enable the smart plan first. For details, see "5.9.2 Smart Plan".

5.9.3.2 Configuring Face Detection

Configure alarm rules for face detection.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

Face Detection

User's Manual

176

Figure 5-87 Face detection

Step 2 Select a channel, and then select

AI by Reorder

AI by Camera

Type

When

AI by Camera

is selected, you can enable

Face Enhancement

to improve face

detection efficiency.

Step 3 Click to enable face detection.

Step 4 Click

Setting

next to

Rule

to draw areas to filter the target.

You can configure two target filters (maximum size and minimum size). The system

triggers an alarm when the size of detected target is between the maximum size and the

minimum size.

Step 5 Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the arming period.

The system triggers corresponding alarm actions only during the arming period.

●

On the time line, drag to set the period.

●

You can also click to set the period.

Step 6 Configure alarm linkage actions. For details, see Table 5-43.

Step 7 Click

Apply

5.9.3.3 AI Search (Face Detection)

You can search for the detected faces and play back related recordings.

User's Manual

177

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

AI Search

Face Detection

Figure 5-88 Face search

Step 2 Select the channel, enter the start time and end time, and select the attributes.

Step 3 Click

The results are displayed.

For privacy reason, the human faces in the image are intentionally blurred. The actual

image is clear.

Figure 5-89 Search results

User's Manual

178

Related Operations

●

Play related video.

Click a face and then click . The system plays back the video around the snapshot time.

●

Export.

Click

Export

to export results in Excel format.

●

Back up.

Select one or more images, click

Backup

, select the storage path and file type, and then click

Start

to back up the selected files to an external storage device.

●

Lock.

Select one or more images and then click

Lock

. The locked files will not be overwritten.

●

Add tags.

Select one or more images and then click

Add Tag

●

Add to face database.

Click

Add to Face Database

, enter corresponding information, and then add the image to the

face database.

Figure 5-90 Add face image to database

5.9.4 Face & Body Detection

After enabling face & body detection, you can view the face and body snapshots and related

attributes on the live page.

5.9.4.1 Enabling Smart Plan

To use AI by camera, you need to enable the smart plan first. For details, see "5.9.2 Smart Plan".

5.9.4.2 Configuring Face & Body Detection

Configure alarm rules for face and body detection.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

Face Detection

User's Manual

179

Figure 5-91 Face and body detection

Step 2 Select a channel, and then click to enable the function.

Step 3 Enable

Face & Body Image Enhancement

to improve detection efficiency.

Step 4 Configure target filters.

You can configure two target filters (maximum size and minimum size). The system

triggers an alarm when the size of detected target is between the maximum size and the

minimum size.

Step 5 Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the arming period.

The system triggers corresponding alarm actions only during the arming period.

●

On the time line, drag to set the period.

●

You can also click to set the period.

Step 6 Configure alarm linkage actions. For details, see Table 5-43.

Step 7 Click

Apply

5.9.4.3 AI Search (Face & Body Detection)

To search for face detection results, see "5.9.3.3 AI Search (Face Detection)". To search for body

detection results, see "5.9.8.3.1 Human Detection".

5.9.5 Face Recognition

The system compares the detected faces with the faces in the database to judge whether the

detected face belongs to the database. When the similarity reaches the defined threshold, an alarm

is triggered.

User's Manual

180

5.9.5.1 Enabling Smart Plan

To use AI by camera, you need to enable the smart plan first. For details, see "5.9.2 Smart Plan".

5.9.5.2 Creating Face Database

Create face databases to manage face images for face recognition.

5.9.5.2.1 Creating Local Face Databases

You can create face databases on the Device to manage face images for face recognition by Device.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Database

Face Database Config

Figure 5-92 Face database configuration

Step 2 Select

Local

Type

, and then click

Add

User's Manual

181

Figure 5-93 Add database

Step 3 Select

Normal Database

from the

Type

list, and then enter database name.

Step 4 Click

5.9.5.2.2 Creating Remote Face Databases

The Device can get face databases from the remote devices, and also allows creating face databases

for remote devices. The remote device face database is suitable for face recognition by Camera.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Database

Face Database Config

Step 2 Select

Remote

Type

, select a channel and then click

Add

Step 3 Enter database name.

Step 4 Click

5.9.5.2.3 Creating the Passerby Database

If you use the passerby database for alarm linkage, when the detected face is not in the face

database, the system automatically captures the face image, and then save it to the passerby

database.

This function is available on select models.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Database

Face Database Config

Step 2 Select

Local

Type

, and then click

Add

You can create only one passerby database.

User's Manual

182

Figure 5-94 Add database

Step 3 Select

Passerby Database

from the

Type

list, and then configure other parameters.

Table 5-26 Passerby database parameters

Parameter Description

Name Enter a name for the passerby database.

Number of Images

Configure the number of images that the database can

contain.

Storage Full

Select the storage strategy when space is full.

●

Stop: No more images can be added.

●

Overwrite: The newest images overwrite the oldest

images. Back up the old images as necessary.

Time

Set the period in which the system removes duplicate face

images from the database.

Step 4 Click

5.9.5.3 Adding Images to Face Database

You can add face images to the existing databases one by one or in batches.

5.9.5.3.1 Adding Face Images One by One

You can add one face image to the database. It is for the scenario that the registered human face

picture amount is small.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Database

Face Database Config

Step 2 Click of the database that you want to configure.

User's Manual

183

Figure 5-95 Databases details

Step 3 Click

Figure 5-96 Register

Step 4 Click to add a face image.

User's Manual

184

Figure 5-97 Browse

Step 5 Select a face image and then enter the registration information.

Step 6 Click

The system prompts the registration is successful.

Step 7 On the

Details

page, click

The system prompts modeling is successful.

If the system prompts modeling is in process, wait a while and then click

again. If

modeling failed, the registered face image cannot be used for face recognition.

Related Operations

●

Edit registration information.

Click to modify the registration information.

●

Model face images.

The face images are modeled automatically after added to face database. You can also model

face images manually.

◇

On the

Database Config

page, select a database, and then click

Modeling

to model all the

face images in the database.

◇

On the

Details

page, select one or more face images, and then click

Modeling

to model the

selected images.

●

Export face images.

Select one or more face images, and then click

Export

●

Delete face images.

Select one or more face images, and then click

Delete

User's Manual

185

5.9.5.3.2 Adding Face Images in Batches

The system supports batch add if you want to import several human face image at the same time.

Procedure

Step 1 Give a name to the face picture by referring to the following table.

Table 5-27 Naming rule

Naming format Description

Name Enter the name.

Gender Enter 1 or 2. 1 represents male, and 2 represents female.

Birthday Enter numbers in the format of yyyy-mm-dd.

Region Enter the abbreviation of region. For example, CN for China.

Credential Type 1 represents ID card; 2 represents passport; 3 represents officer card.

Credential No. Enter the credential number.

Address Enter the address.

Step 2 Select

Main Menu

Database

Face Database Config

Step 3 Click of the database that you want to configure.

Step 4 Click

Batch Register

Figure 5-98 Batch register

Step 5 Click or to import face images.

Step 6 Click

Related Operations

●

Edit registration information.

Click to modify the registration information.

●

Model face images.

The face images are modeled automatically after added to face database. You can also model

face images manually.

User's Manual

186

◇

On the

Database Config

page, select a database, and then click

Modeling

to model all the

face images in the database.

◇

On the

Details

page, select one or more face images, and then click

Modeling

to model the

selected images.

●

Export face images.

Select one or more face images, and then click

Export

●

Delete face images.

Select one or more face images, and then click

Delete

5.9.5.4 Configuring Face Recognition

Configure alarm rules for face recognition.

5.9.5.4.1 Configuring AI by Recorder

Prerequisites

Make sure the face detection function is enabled at corresponding channel.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

Face Recognition

Step 2 Select the channel, enable the function, and select

AI by Recorder

in the

Type

list.

Figure 5-99 AI by recorder

Step 3 Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure arming periods. The corresponding alarm

actions are linked by the alarm events triggered during armed period.

Step 4 Arm target face database.

●

General Alarm

: The alarm is triggered when the similarity of detected faces reaches

the defined value.

1. Select

General Alarm

AI Mode

2. Click

Setting

next to

Target Face Database

User's Manual

187

3. Select the face database that you want to arm, and then click

4. Click to modify similarity.

5. Click to configure alarm linkages.

●

Stranger Alarm

: The alarm is triggered when the similarity of detected faces does not

reach the defined value.

Figure 5-100 Stranger alarm (AI by recorder)

1. Select

Stranger Alarm

AI Mode

2. Click enable the function.

3. Configure the alarm linkage actions. For details on alarm linkage, see Table 5-43.

Step 5 Click

Apply

5.9.5.4.2 Configuring AI by Camera

Make sure the connected camera supports face recognition.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

Face Recognition

Step 2 Select the channel, enable the function, and select

AI by Camera

in the

Type

list.

User's Manual

188

Figure 5-101 AI by camera

Step 3 Enable

Face Enhancement

to make the faces displayed more clear.

Step 4 Click

Rule

to draw areas to filter the target.

You can configure two target filters (maximum size and minimum size). When the target is

smaller than the minimum size or larger than the maximum size, no alarms will be

activated.

Step 5 Select target face database, and then click to configure alarm linkage. For details on

alarm linkage, see Table 5-43.

Step 6 Click

Apply

5.9.5.5 AI Search (Face Recognition)

You can search for the face recognition results by attributes or by image.

5.9.5.5.1 Search by Attributes

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

AI Search

Face Recognition

Search by Attributes

User's Manual

189

Figure 5-102 Search by attributes

Step 2 Select the channel and set the parameters including start time, end time, gender, age,

glasses, beard, mask, name and similarity.

Step 3 Click

The faces in the image are intentionally blurred for privacy protection. The actual images

are clear.

Figure 5-103 Search results

Related Operations

●

Play back video.

Click an image, and then click to play back the related video.

During playback, you can:

User's Manual

190

◇

Click to pause.

◇

Click to stop.

◇

Click to display AI rule. The icon changes to .

●

Add tags.

Select one or more images, and then click

Add Tag

●

Lock.

Select one or more images, and then click

Lock

. The locked files will not be overwritten.

●

Export.

Select one or more images, and then click

Export

to export selected search results in excel.

●

Back up.

Select one or more images, click

Backup

, select the storage path and file type, and then click

Start

to export files to external storage device.

5.9.5.5.2 Search by Image

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

AI Search

Face Recognition

Search by Picture

Figure 5-104 Search by image

Step 2 Upload face images.

●

Face Database

: Upload face images from database.

●

Local Upload

: Upload face images from external storage device.

Step 3 Select the image used to search and then set the parameters including channel, start time,

end time, gender, age, glasses, beard, mask, and similarity.

Step 4 Click

The search results are displayed.

Related Operations

●

Play back video.

User's Manual

191

Click an image, and then click to play back the related video.

During playback, you can:

◇

Click to pause.

◇

Click to stop.

◇

Click to display AI rule. The icon changes to .

●

Add tags.

Select one or more images, and then click

Add Tag

●

Lock.

Select one or more images, and then click

Lock

. The locked files will not be overwritten.

●

Export.

Select one or more images, and then click

Export

to export selected search results in excel.

●

Back up.

Select one or more images, click

Backup

, select the storage path and file type, and then click

Start

to export files to external storage device.

5.9.5.5.3 Report Query

You can search for and export face statistics.

●

The statistics might be overwritten when the storage space runs out. Back up in time.

●

When you restore the Device to factory settings, all the data except data in the external storage

device will be cleared. You can clear the data in the external storage device through formatting

or other methods.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Report Query

Face Statistics

Figure 5-105 Face statistics

Step 2 Select the report type, start time and end time, and then click

User's Manual

192

Related Operations

●

Switch chart type.

Click

Bart Chart

Line Chart

to switch the chart type.

●

Export.

Select file type, and then click

Export

to export the report in picture or csv format.

5.9.6 IVS

The IVS function processes and analyzes the images to extract the key information to match the

specified rules. When the detected behaviors match the rules, the system activates alarms.

●

This function is available on select models.

●

IVS and face detection cannot be enabled at the same time.

5.9.6.1 Enabling Smart Plan

To use AI by camera, you need to enable the smart plan first. For details, see "5.9.2 Smart Plan".

5.9.6.2 Configuring IVS

5.9.6.2.1 Tripwire

When the detection target crosses the warning line along the set direction, the system performs an

alarm linkage action.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

IVS

User's Manual

193

Figure 5-106 IVS

Step 2 Select channel and AI type.

Step 3 Click

Add

to add a rule.

Step 4 On the

Type

list, select

Tripwire

Step 5 Draw the detection rule.

1) Click to draw a straight line or a curve on the surveillance video image. Right-click

the image to stop drawing.

User's Manual

194

Figure 5-107 Tripwire (AI by camera)

Figure 5-108 Tripwire (AI by recorder)

2) Click to draw the minimum size or maximum size to filter the target.

The system triggers an alarm only when the size of detected target is between the

maximum size and the minimum size.

3) Configure the parameters.

User's Manual

195

Table 5-28 Tripwire parameters

Parameter Description

Name Customize the rule name.

Direction

Set the tripwire direction, including A

→

B, B

→

A and A

↔

Target Filter

Click and then select effective target. With

Human

and

Motor

Vehicle

selected by default, the system automatically identifies the

person and motor vehicle appeared within the monitoring range.

4) Click

Step 6 Configure alarm schedule and linkage.

Figure 5-109 Schedule and alarm linkage

1) Click .

2) Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the alarm period.

The system performs linkage actions only for alarms during the arming period.

●

On the time line, drag to set the period.

●

You can also click to set the period.

3) Configure alarm linkage. For details, see Table 5-43.

4) Click

Apply

Step 7 Select the

Enable

checkbox and then click

Apply

5.9.6.2.2 Intrusion

When the detection target passes the edge of the monitoring area, and enters, leaves or traverses

the monitoring area, the system performs an alarm linkage action.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

IVS

User's Manual

196

Figure 5-110 IVS

Step 2 Select channel and AI type.

Step 3 Click

Add

to add a rule.

Step 4 On the

Type

list, select

Intrusion

Step 5 Draw the detection rule.

1) Click to draw the rule on the surveillance video image. Right-click the image to

stop drawing.

User's Manual

197

Figure 5-111 Intrusion (AI by camera)

Figure 5-112 Intrusion (AI by recorder)

2) Click to draw the minimum size or maximum size to filter the target.

The system triggers an alarm only when the size of detected target is between the

maximum size and the minimum size.

3) Configure the parameters.

User's Manual

198

Table 5-29 Intrusion parameters

Parameter Description

Name Customize the rule name.

Action Set the intrusion action, including appear and crossing area.

Direction Set the direction to cross the area, including enter, exit and both.

Target Filter

Click and then select effective target. With

Human

and

Motor

Vehicle

selected by default, the system automatically identifies the

person and motor vehicle appeared within the monitoring range.

4) Click

Step 6 Configure alarm schedule and linkage.

Figure 5-113 Schedule and alarm linkage

1) Click .

2) Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the alarm period.

The system performs linkage actions only for alarms during the arming period.

●

On the time line, drag to set the period.

●

You can also click to set the period.

3) Configure alarm linkage. For details, see Table 5-43.

4) Click

Apply

Step 7 Select

Enable

checkbox and then click

Apply

5.9.6.2.3 Abandoned Object Detection

The system generates an alarm when there is an abandoned object in the specified zone.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

IVS

User's Manual

199

Figure 5-114 IVS

Step 2 Select channel and AI type.

Step 3 Click

Add

to add a rule.

Step 4 On the

Type

list, select

Abandoned Object

Step 5 Draw the detection rule.

1) Click to draw a rectangle on the surveillance video image. Right-click the image to

stop drawing.

User's Manual

200

Figure 5-115 Abandoned object rule

2) Click to draw the minimum size or maximum size to filter the target.

The system triggers an alarm only when the size of detected target is between the

maximum size and the minimum size.

3) Configure parameters.

Table 5-30 Parameters of abandoned object detection

Parameter Description

Preset Select a preset you want to use IVS.

Name Customize the rule name.

Duration

The system generates an alarm once the object is in the zone for the

defined period.

4) Click

Step 6 Configure alarm schedule and linkage.

User's Manual

201

Figure 5-116 Schedule and alarm linkage

1) Click .

2) Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the alarm period.

The system performs linkage actions only for alarms during the arming period.

●

On the time line, drag to set the period.

●

You can also click to set the period.

3) Configure alarm linkage. For details, see Table 5-43.

4) Click

Apply

Step 7 Select

Enable

checkbox and then click

Apply

5.9.6.2.4 Fast Moving

You can detect the fast moving object in the specified zone.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

IVS

User's Manual

202

Figure 5-117 IVS

Step 2 Select channel and AI type.

Step 3 Click

Add

to add a rule.

Step 4 On the

Type

list, select

Fast Moving

Step 5 Draw the detection rule.

1) Click to draw a rectangle on the surveillance video image. Right-click the image to

stop drawing.

User's Manual

203

Figure 5-118 Fast moving

2) Click to draw the minimum size or maximum size to filter the target.

The system triggers an alarm only when the size of detected target is between the

maximum size and the minimum size.

3) Configure parameters.

Table 5-31 Fast moving parameters

Parameter Description

Preset Select a preset you want to use IVS.

Name Customize the rule name.

Sensitivity

You can set alarm sensitivity. The higher the value, the easier to detect a

fast moving object but meanwhile the higher false alarm rate.

4) Click

Step 6 Configure alarm schedule and linkage.

User's Manual

204

Figure 5-119 Schedule and alarm linkage

1) Click .

2) Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the alarm period.

The system performs linkage actions only for alarms during the arming period.

●

On the time line, drag to set the period.

●

You can also click to set the period.

3) Configure alarm linkage. For details, see Table 5-43.

4) Click

Apply

Step 7 Select

Enable

checkbox and then click

Apply

5.9.6.2.5 Parking

When the detection target stays in the monitoring area longer than the set duration, the system

performs alarm linkage action.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

IVS

User's Manual

205

Figure 5-120 IVS

Step 2 Select channel and AI type.

Step 3 Click

Add

to add a rule.

Step 4 On the

Type

list, select

Parking

Step 5 Draw the detection rule.

1) Click to draw a rectangle on the surveillance video image. Right-click the image to

stop drawing.

User's Manual

206

Figure 5-121 Parking

2) Click to draw the minimum size or maximum size to filter the target.

The system triggers an alarm only when the size of detected target is between the

maximum size and the minimum size.

3) Configure parameters.

Table 5-32 Parking parameters

Parameter Description

Preset Set the preset point for IVS detection.

Name Customize the rule name.

Duration Set how long the object stays until the alarm is triggered.

4) Click

Step 6 Configure alarm schedule and linkage.

User's Manual

207

Figure 5-122 Schedule and alarm linkage

1) Click .

2) Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the alarm period.

The system performs linkage actions only for alarms during the arming period.

●

On the time line, drag to set the period.

●

You can also click to set the period.

3) Configure alarm linkage. For details, see Table 5-43.

4) Click

Apply

Step 7 Select

Enable

checkbox and then click

Apply

5.9.6.2.6 Crowd Gathering

The system generates an alarm once people are gathering in the specified zone longer than the

defined duration.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

IVS

User's Manual

208

Figure 5-123 IVS

Step 2 Select channel and AI type.

Step 3 Click

Add

to add a rule.

Step 4 On the

Type

list, select

Crowd Gathering Estimation

Step 5 Draw the detection rule.

1) Click to draw a rectangle on the surveillance video image. Right-click the image to

stop drawing.

User's Manual

209

Figure 5-124 Crowd gathering

2) Click to draw the minimum size or maximum size to filter the target.

The system triggers an alarm only when the size of detected target is between the

maximum size and the minimum size.

3) Set parameters.

Table 5-33 Crowd gathering parameters

Parameter Description

Preset Select a preset you want to use IVS.

Name Customize the rule name.

Duration Set how long the object stays until the alarm is triggered.

Sensitivity

You can set alarm sensitivity. The higher the value, the easier to detect

crowd gathering but meanwhile the higher false alarm rate.

4) Click

Step 6 Configure alarm schedule and linkage.

User's Manual

210

Figure 5-125 Schedule and alarm linkage

1) Click .

2) Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the alarm period.

The system performs linkage actions only for alarms during the arming period.

●

On the time line, drag to set the period.

●

You can also click to set the period.

3) Configure alarm linkage. For details, see Table 5-43.

4) Click

Apply

Step 7 Select

Enable

checkbox and then click

Apply

5.9.6.2.7 Missing Object Detection

The system generates an alarm when there is missing object in the specified zone.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

IVS

User's Manual

211

Figure 5-126 IVS

Step 2 Select channel and AI type.

Step 3 Click

Add

to add a rule.

Step 4 On the

Type

list, select

Missing

Step 5 Draw the detection rule.

1) Click to draw a rectangle on the surveillance video image. Right-click the image to

stop drawing.

User's Manual

212

Figure 5-127 Missing object

2) Click to draw the minimum size or maximum size to filter the target.

The system triggers an alarm only when the size of detected target is between the

maximum size and the minimum size.

3) Configure parameters.

Table 5-34 Parameters of missing object detection

Parameter Description

Preset Set the preset point for IVS detection according to the actual needs.

Name Customize the rule name.

Duration Set how long the object stays until the alarm is triggered.

4) Click

Step 6 Configure alarm schedule and linkage.

User's Manual

213

Figure 5-128 Schedule and alarm linkage

1) Click .

2) Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the alarm period.

The system performs linkage actions only for alarms during the arming period.

●

On the time line, drag to set the period.

●

You can also click to set the period.

3) Configure alarm linkage. For details, see Table 5-43.

4) Click

Apply

Step 7 Select

Enable

checkbox and then click

Apply

5.9.6.2.8 Loitering Detection

The system generates an alarm once the object is staying in the specified zone longer than the

defined duration.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

IVS

User's Manual

214

Figure 5-129 IVS

Step 2 Select channel and AI type.

Step 3 Click

Add

to add a rule.

Step 4 On the

Type

list, select

Loitering Detection

Step 5 Draw the detection rule.

1) Click to draw a rectangle on the surveillance video image. Right-click the image to

stop drawing.

User's Manual

215

Figure 5-130 Loitering detection

2) Click to draw the minimum size or maximum size to filter the target.

The system triggers an alarm only when the size of detected target is between the

maximum size and the minimum size.

3) Configure parameters.

Table 5-35 Loitering detection parameters

Parameter Description

Preset Set the preset point for IVS detection.

Name Customize the rule name.

Duration Set how long the object stays until the alarm is triggered.

4) Click

Step 6 Configure alarm schedule and linkage.

User's Manual

216

Figure 5-131 Schedule and alarm linkage

1) Click .

2) Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the alarm period.

The system performs linkage actions only for alarms during the arming period.

●

On the time line, drag to set the period.

●

You can also click to set the period.

3) Configure alarm linkage. For details, see Table 5-43.

4) Click

Apply

Step 7 Select

Enable

checkbox and then click

Apply

5.9.6.3 AI Search (IVS)

You can search for IVS detection results.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

AI Search

IVS

User's Manual

217

Figure 5-132 IVS search

Step 2 Select a channel, start time, end time, event type, and then click

The search results are displayed.

Related Operations

●

Play back video.

Click an image, and then click to play back the related video.

During playback, you can:

◇

Click to pause.

◇

Click to stop.

◇

Click to display AI rule. The icon changes to .

●

Add tags.

Select one or more images, and then click

Add Tag

●

Lock.

Select one or more images, and then click

Lock

. The locked files will not be overwritten.

●

Export.

Select one or more images, and then click

Export

to export selected search results in excel.

●

Back up.

Select one or more images, click

Backup

, select the storage path and file type, and then click

Start

to export files to external storage device.

5.9.7 Stereo Analysis

By drawing and setting the rules of stereo behavior analysis, the system will perform alarm linkage

actions when the video matches the detection rule. Types of events include: people approach

detection, fall detection, violence detection, people No. exception detection and people stay

detection.

User's Manual

218

●

This function requires access to a camera that supports stereo behavior analysis.

●

Stereo analysis and IVS are mutually exclusive and cannot be enabled at the same time.

5.9.7.1 Enabling Smart Plan

To use AI by camera, you need to enable the smart plan first. For details, see "5.9.2 Smart Plan".

5.9.7.2 Configuring Stereo Analysis

5.9.7.2.1 People Approach Detection

When two people stay in the same detection area longer than the defined duration or when the

distance between two people is larger or smaller than the defined threshold, an alarm will be

triggered.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

Stereo Analysis

Step 2 Select a channel and then click

Add

Step 3 Select

Enable

and then set

Type

People Approach Detection

Step 4 Draw detection rule.

1) Click , and then draw a detection area on the video image. Right-click the image to

stop drawing.

2) Configure parameters.

Table 5-36 Parameters of people approach detection

Parameter Description

Name Customize the rule name.

Sensitivity Set alarm sensitivity.

Duration

Set how long two people stay in the same detection area until an

alarm is triggered.

Repeat Alarm Time

Set repeat alarm time. If the alarm-triggering event continues, an

alarm will be triggered again when repeat alarm time passed.

Interval Threshold

When the distance between people in the area is greater than or less

than the defined threshold, an alarm will be triggered.

3) Click

Step 5 Configure alarm schedule and linkage.

User's Manual

219

Figure 5-133 Schedule and alarm linkage

1) Click .

2) Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the alarm period.

The system performs linkage actions only for alarms during the arming period.

●

On the time line, drag to set the period.

●

You can also click to set the period.

3) Configure alarm linkage. For details, see Table 5-43.

4) Click

Apply

Step 6 Click

Apply

5.9.7.2.2 Fall Detection

When someone falls from a height in the detection area and the duration of the action is greater

than the defined threshold, an alarm will be triggered.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

Stereo Analysis

Step 2 Select a channel and then click

Add

Step 3 Select

Enable

and then set

Type

Fall Detection

Step 4 Draw detection rule.

1) Click , and then draw a detection area on the video image. Right-click the image to

stop drawing.

2) Configure parameters.

Table 5-37 Parameters of fall detection

Parameter Description

Name Customize the rule name.

Sensitivity Set alarm sensitivity.

Duration Set the minimum time of triggering an alarm when people fall.

User's Manual

220

Parameter Description

Repeat Alarm Time

Set repeat alarm time. If the alarm-triggering event continues, an

alarm will be triggered again when repeat alarm time passed.

3) Click

Step 5 Configure alarm schedule and linkage.

Figure 5-134 Schedule and alarm linkage

1) Click .

2) Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the alarm period.

The system performs linkage actions only for alarms during the arming period.

●

On the time line, drag to set the period.

●

You can also click to set the period.

3) Configure alarm linkage. For details, see Table 5-43.

4) Click

Apply

Step 6 Click

Apply

5.9.7.2.3 Violence Detection

When the target in the detection region has large body movements such as smashing and fighting,

an alarm will be triggered.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

Stereo Analysis

Step 2 Select a channel and then click

Add

Step 3 Select

Enable

and then set

Type

Violence Detection

Step 4 Draw detection rule.

1) Click , and then draw a detection area on the video image. Right-click the image to

stop drawing.

2) Configure parameters.

User's Manual

221

Table 5-38 Parameters of violence detection

Parameter Description

Name Customize the rule name.

Sensitivity Set alarm sensitivity.

3) Click

Step 5 Configure alarm schedule and linkage.

Figure 5-135 Schedule and alarm linkage

1) Click .

2) Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the alarm period.

The system performs linkage actions only for alarms during the arming period.

●

On the time line, drag to set the period.

●

You can also click to set the period.

3) Configure alarm linkage. For details, see Table 5-43.

4) Click

Apply

Step 6 Click

Apply

5.9.7.2.4 People No. Exception Detection

When the system detects an abnormal number of people in the same detection area, an alarm will

be triggered.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

Stereo Analysis

Step 2 Select a channel and then click

Add

Step 3 Select

Enable

and then set

Type

People No. Exception Detection

Step 4 Draw detection rule.

1) Click , and then draw a detection area on the video image. Right-click the image to

stop drawing.

User's Manual

222

2) Configure parameters.

Table 5-39 Parameters of people No. exception detection

Parameter Description

Name Customize the rule name.

Sensitivity Set alarm sensitivity.

Duration

Set the minimum time to trigger an alarm after the system detects an

abnormal number of people.

Repeat Alarm Time

Set repeat alarm time. If the alarm-triggering event continues, an

alarm will be triggered again when repeat alarm time passed.

Alarm People No.

When the number of people in the area is greater than, equal to, or

less than the defined threshold, an alarm will be triggered.

3) Click

Step 5 Configure alarm schedule and linkage.

Figure 5-136 Schedule and alarm linkage

1) Click .

2) Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the alarm period.

The system performs linkage actions only for alarms during the arming period.

●

On the time line, drag to set the period.

●

You can also click to set the period.

3) Configure alarm linkage. For details, see Table 5-43.

4) Click

Apply

Step 6 Click

Apply

5.9.7.2.5 People Stay Detection

When the target stays in the detection area longer than the defined duration, an alarm will be

triggered.

User's Manual

223

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

Stereo Analysis

Step 2 Select a channel and then click

Add

Step 3 Select

Enable

and then set

Type

People Stay Detection

Step 4 Draw detection rule.

1) Click , and then draw a detection area on the video image. Right-click the image to

stop drawing.

2) Configure parameters.

Table 5-40 Parameters of people stay detection

Parameter Description

Name Customize the rule name.

Sensitivity Set alarm sensitivity.

Duration

Set low long people stay in the detection area until an alarm is

triggered.

Repeat Alarm Time

Set repeat alarm time. If the alarm-triggering event continues, an

alarm will be triggered again when repeat alarm time passed.

3) Click

Step 5 Configure alarm schedule and linkage.

Figure 5-137 Schedule and alarm linkage

1) Click .

2) Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the alarm period.

The system performs linkage actions only for alarms during the arming period.

●

On the time line, drag to set the period.

●

You can also click to set the period.

3) Configure alarm linkage. For details, see Table 5-43.

4) Click

Apply

Step 6 Click

Apply

User's Manual

224

5.9.7.3 AI Search (Stereo Analysis)

You can search for detection results of stereo analysis.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

AI Search

Stereo Analysis

Figure 5-138 Stereo analysis search

Step 2 Select a channel, start time, end time, event type, and then click

The search results are displayed.

Related Operations

●

Play back video.

Click an image, and then click to play back the related video.

During playback, you can:

◇

Click to pause.

◇

Click to stop.

◇

Click to display AI rule. The icon changes to .

●

Add tags.

Select one or more images, and then click

Add Tag

●

Lock.

Select one or more images, and then click

Lock

. The locked files will not be overwritten.

●

Export.

Select one or more images, and then click

Export

to export selected search results in excel.

●

Back up.

Select one or more images, click

Backup

, select the storage path and file type, and then click

Start

to export files to external storage device.

User's Manual

225

5.9.8 Video Metadata

The system analyzes real-time video stream to detect the existence of human, motor vehicle, and

non-motor vehicle. Once a target is detected, an alarm is triggered.

5.9.8.1 Enabling Smart Plan

To use AI by camera, you need to enable the smart plan first. For details, see "5.9.2 Smart Plan".

5.9.8.2 Configuring Video Metadata

When a metadata alarm is triggered, the system links the corresponding camera to record videos

and logs and take snapshots. Other alarm linkage actions are not supported for video metadata.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

Video Metadata

Figure 5-139 Video metadata

Step 2 Select a channel and AI type.

AI by Recorder is available on select models.

Step 3 Click

Add

to add a rule.

Step 4 Select

Enable

and then set

Type

People Detection

Non-motor Vehicle Detection

User's Manual

226

Motor Vehicle Detection

Step 5 Draw detection rule.

1) Click , and then draw a detection area on the video image. Right-click the image to

stop drawing.

Figure 5-140 People detection

2) Enter the rule name.

3) Click to draw the minimum size or maximum size to filter the target.

The system triggers an alarm only when the size of detected target is between the

maximum size and the minimum size.

4) Click to enable face detection.

5) Select

A to B

B to A

, or

Both

as direction for tripwire counting.

Tripwire counting is available when AI by Camera is used and the camera supports this

function.

6) Click

Step 6 Click

Apply

5.9.8.3 AI Search (Video Metadata)

You can search for the video metadata detection results and play back related videos.

5.9.8.3.1 Human Detection

Procedure

User's Manual

227

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

AI Search

Human Detection

Figure 5-141 Human detection

Step 2 Select a channel, start time, end time, and set corresponding parameters.

Step 3 Click

For privacy protection, the faces are intentionally blurred.

Figure 5-142 Search results

Related Operations

User's Manual

228

●

Play back video.

Click an image, and then click to play back the related video.

During playback, you can:

◇

Click to pause.

◇

Click to stop.

◇

Click to display AI rule. The icon changes to .

●

Add tags.

Select one or more images, and then click

Add Tag

●

Lock.

Select one or more images, and then click

Lock

. The locked files will not be overwritten.

●

Export.

Select one or more images, and then click

Export

to export selected search results in excel.

●

Back up.

Select one or more images, click

Backup

, select the storage path and file type, and then click

Start

to export files to external storage device.

5.9.8.3.2 Motor Vehicle Detection

You can search for motor vehicle detection results according to the vehicle parameters.

This function is available on select models.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

AI Search

Motor Vehicle Detection

User's Manual

229

Figure 5-143 Motor vehicle detection

Step 2 Select a channel and then set parameters.

●

The system supports fuzzy search of plate numbers.

●

The system searches all plate numbers by default if you have not set a plate number.

Step 3 Click

The search results are displayed.

Related Operations

●

Play back video.

Click an image, and then click to play back the related video.

During playback, you can:

◇

Click to pause.

◇

Click to stop.

◇

Click to display AI rule. The icon changes to .

●

Add tags.

Select one or more images, and then click

Add Tag

●

Lock.

Select one or more images, and then click

Lock

. The locked files will not be overwritten.

●

Export.

Select one or more images, and then click

Export

to export selected search results in excel.

User's Manual

230

●

Back up.

Select one or more images, click

Backup

, select the storage path and file type, and then click

Start

to export files to external storage device.

5.9.8.3.3 Non-motor Vehicle Detection

You can search for non-motor vehicle detection results according to the non-motor vehicle

parameters.

This function is available on select models.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

AI Search

Non-Motor Vehicle Detection

Figure 5-144 Non-motor vehicle detection

Step 2 Select a channel and then set parameters.

Step 3 Click

User's Manual

231

Figure 5-145 Search results

Related Operations

●

Play back video.

Click an image, and then click to play back the related video.

During playback, you can:

◇

Click to pause.

◇

Click to stop.

◇

Click to display AI rule. The icon changes to .

●

Add tags.

Select one or more images, and then click

Add Tag

●

Lock.

Select one or more images, and then click

Lock

. The locked files will not be overwritten.

●

Export.

Select one or more images, and then click

Export

to export selected search results in excel.

●

Back up.

Select one or more images, click

Backup

, select the storage path and file type, and then click

Start

to export files to external storage device.

5.9.8.3.4 Report Query

You can search for and export video metadata statistics.

●

The statistics might be overwritten when the storage space runs out. Back up in time.

●

When you restore the Device to factory settings, all the data except data in the external storage

device will be cleared. You can clear the data in the external storage device through formatting

or other methods.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Report Query

Video Metadata

User's Manual

232

Figure 5-146 Metadata statistics

Step 2 Select channel, report type, start time and end time, direction and then click

Related Operations

●

Switch chart type.

Click

Bart Chart

Line Chart

to switch the chart type.

●

Export.

Select file type, and then click

Export

to export the report in picture or csv format.

5.9.9 ANPR

The system extracts the plate number on the surveillance video and then compare it with the

specified plate information. When a match is detected, the system triggers an alarm.

5.9.9.1 Adding Vehicle Blocklist and Allowlist

To facilitate vehicle management, you can add the plate numbers to the blocklist or allowlist. The

system can compare the detected plate information with the plate on the blocklist and allowlist and

then trigger the corresponding alarm linkage.

●

With the blocklist and allowlist enabled, on the live page, the plate on the blocklist is displayed as

red on the plate list and the plate on the allowlist is displayed as green. For the plate not on the

blocklist or allowlist, the color is white.

●

The added blocklist and allowlist will be synchronized to the connected ITC camera.

Procedure

User's Manual

233

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Database

Vehicle Blocklist/Allowlist

Figure 5-147 Vehicle blocklist/allowlist

Step 2 Click

Add

Step 3 Set plate information such as plate number, car owner name, select

Block List

Allow

List

, and then set validity period.

Step 4 Click

Related Operations

●

Search.

Enter keywords for

Plate No.

and

Owner Name

, select type and then click

●

Import and export plate information.

◇

Import: Click

Import

, select the corresponding file, and then click

Browse

to import the file.

◇

Export: Click

Export

, select the file storage path and then click

Save

●

Delete plate information.

◇

Delete one by one: Click the of the corresponding plate number.

◇

Delete in batches: Select the plate numbers and then click

Delete

5.9.9.2 Configuring ANPR

Configure the ANPR alarm rules.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

ANPR

User's Manual

234

Figure 5-148 ANPR

Step 2 Select a channel and then select the

Enable

checkbox to enable ANPR.

Step 3 (Optional) Enable

Sync Vehicle Blocklist/Allowlist

to synchronize the blocklist and

allowlist on the NVR to the connected camera.

Step 4 Click

General

(default),

Blocklist

Allowlist

tab.

Before enabling the blocklist alarm or allowlist alarm, you need to add the corresponding

plate information.

●

General

: The system triggers an alarm when it detects any plate number.

●

Block List

: The system triggers an alarm when it detects plate number on the blocklist.

●

Allow List

: The system triggers an alarm when it detects plate number on the allowlist.

Step 5 Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the arming period.

The system triggers corresponding alarm actions only during the arming period.

●

On the time line, drag to set the period.

●

You can also click to set the period.

Step 6 Configure alarm linkage actions. For details, see Table 5-43.

Step 7 Click

Apply

User's Manual

235

5.9.9.3 AI Search (ANPR)

You can search for the ANPR detection results. For details, see "5.9.8.3.2 Motor Vehicle Detection".

5.9.10 Crowd Distribution

The system detects the crowd distribution. When the crowd density exceeds the defined threshold,

an alarm is triggered.

5.9.10.1 Enabling Smart Plan

To use AI by camera, you need to enable the smart plan first. For details, see "5.9.2 Smart Plan".

5.9.10.2 Configuring Crowd Distribution

Configure the alarm rules of crowd distribution detection.

Prerequisites

Make sure that the connected camera supports the crowd distribution function.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

Crowd Distribution

Figure 5-149 Crowd distribution

Step 2 Select a channel and then click next to

Enable

Step 3 Configure parameters.

User's Manual

236

Table 5-41 Crowd distribution parameters

Parameter Description

Crowd Density

(Global)

Click and then configure the density threshold.

Crowd Density

Alarm Tracking After an alarm occurs, the system tracks the target automatically.

Step 4 Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the arming period.

The system triggers corresponding alarm actions only during the arming period.

●

On the time line, drag to set the period.

●

You can also click to set the period.

Step 5 Configure alarm linkage actions. For details, see Table 5-43.

Step 6 Click

Apply

5.9.10.3 Report Query

You can search for and export video metadata statistics.

●

The statistics might be overwritten when the storage space runs out. Back up in time.

●

When you restore the Device to factory settings, all the data except data in the external storage

device will be cleared. You can clear the data in the external storage device through formatting

or other methods.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Report Query

Crowd Density

Step 2 Select the channel, report type, start time and end time, and then click

Related Operations

●

Switch chart type.

Click

Bart Chart

Line Chart

to switch the chart type.

●

Export.

Select the file type, and then click

Export

to export the report in picture or csv format.

5.9.11 People Counting

The system can calculate the number of entry or exit people in the detection zone. An alarm is

triggered when the number has exceeded the threshold.

Make sure that the connected camera supports people counting.

5.9.11.1 Enabling Smart Plan

To use AI by camera, you need to enable the smart plan first. For details, see "5.9.2 Smart Plan".

User's Manual

237

5.9.11.2 Configuring People Counting

The system counts the number of people in and out of the detection area. When the number of

entry, exit or staying people exceeds the threshold, an alarm is triggered.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

People Counting

Figure 5-150 People counting

Step 2 Select a channel and then click

Add

Step 3 Select the

Enable

checkbox and then set

Type

People Counting

Step 4 Draw people counting rule.

1) Click to draw people counting rule. Right-click the image to stop drawing.

User's Manual

238

Figure 5-151 People counting rule

2) Customize the rule name and then select direction.

3) Click

Step 5 Click under

Parameters

and then configure the parameters.

Table 5-42 People counting parameters

Parameter Description

OSD

●

Select

Enter No.

, and then the number of people entering the

detection zone will be displayed on the live page.

●

Select

Exit No.

, and then the number of people leaving the detection

zone will be displayed on the live page.

Setting

●

Enter No.

: An alarm is triggered when the number of people entering

the detection zone exceeds the defined threshold.

●

Exit No.

: An alarm is triggered when the number of people leaving the

detection zone exceeds the defined threshold.

●

Stay No.

: An alarm is triggered when the number of people staying

the detection zone exceeds the defined threshold.

Step 6 Click under

Trigger

to configure alarm schedule and linkage. For details on alarm

linkage, see Table 5-43.

Step 7 Click

Apply

5.9.11.3 Configuring In Area No.

When the number of people in the detection area is larger or lower than the defined threshold, or

when the staying period exceeds the defined duration, an alarm is triggered.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

People Counting

User's Manual

239

Figure 5-152 People counting

Step 2 Select a channel and then click

Add

Step 3 Select the

Enable

checkbox and then set

Type

In Area No.

Step 4 Draw people counting rule.

1) Click to draw a rule. Right-click the image to stop drawing.

2) Configure the parameters.

3) Click

Step 5 Click and then enable in-area people number alarm and stay alarm.

Step 6 Click under

Trigger

to configure the alarm schedule and linkage

Step 7 Click

Apply

5.9.11.4 Queuing

After configuring queuing alarm, the system can realize the corresponding linkage actions once the

number of people in the queue or the waiting time has triggered an alarm.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

People Counting

Queuing

User's Manual

240

Figure 5-153 Queuing

Step 2 Select a channel, and then click

Add

Step 3 Select the

Enable

checkbox.

Step 4 Click to draw queuing rule and area.

Step 5 Click under

Parameters

, and then enable

Queue People No. Alarm

Queue Time

Alarm

Step 6 Click under

Trigger

to configure alarm schedule and linkage.

Step 7 Click

Apply

5.9.11.5 Report Query

You can search for and export the people counting statistics.

●

The statistics might be overwritten when the storage space runs out. Back up in time.

●

When you restore the Device to factory settings, all the data except data in the external storage

device will be cleared. You can clear the data in the external storage device through formatting

or other methods.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Report Query

People Counting

User's Manual

241

Figure 5-154 People counting

Step 2 Select channel, rule, report type, start and end time, and direction, and then click

Related Operations

●

Switch chart type.

Click

Bart Chart

Line Chart

to switch the chart type.

●

Export.

Select file type, and then click

Export

to export the report in picture or csv format.

5.9.12 Heat Map

The Device can monitor the distribution of active objects in the detection zone during a period of

time, and use different colors to display the objects on the heat map.

5.9.12.1 Enabling Smart Plan

To use AI by camera, you need to enable the smart plan first. For details, see "5.9.2 Smart Plan".

5.9.12.2 Configuring Heat map

Heat map technology can monitor the active objects distribution status on the specified zone during

a period of time, and use different colors to display on the heat map.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

Heat Map

User's Manual

242

Figure 5-155 Heat map

Step 2 Select a channel and then click to enable the function.

Step 3 Click

Setting

to configure the alarm schedule.

Figure 5-156 Schedule

Step 4 Click

Apply

5.9.12.3 Report Query

You can search for and export the heat map report of general and fisheye cameras.

5.9.12.3.1 General

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Report Query

Heat Map

General

User's Manual

243

Figure 5-157 General

Step 2 Select the channel, start time, and end time.

Step 3 Click

Step 4 Click

Export

to export the heat map.

5.9.12.3.2 Fisheye

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Report Query

Heat Map

Fisheye

Figure 5-158 Fisheye

Step 2 Set channel, type and period, and then click

Step 3 Click

Export

to export the heat map.

User's Manual

244

5.9.13 SMD

You can use SMD (Smart Motion Detection) to detect humans and vehicles in the video, and store

the detection results in structured storage for fast retrieval.

5.9.13.1 Enabling Smart Plan

To use AI by camera, you need to enable the smart plan first. For details, see "5.9.2 Smart Plan".

5.9.13.2 Configuring SMD

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

SMD

Figure 5-159 SMD

Step 2 Select a channel and AI type.

Step 3 Click to enable the function.

Step 4 Configure the sensitivity.

The higher the value, the easier it is to trigger an alarm. But meanwhile, the false alarm

might occur. The default value is recommended.

Step 5 Select effective target from

Human

and

Motor Vehicle

Step 6 Click

Setting

next to schedule to configure the alarm period.

Step 7 Configure alarm linkage.

User's Manual

245

Table 5-43 Alarm linkage parameters

Parameter Description

Anti-Dither

The system records only one motion detection event within the defined

period.

Alarm-out Port When an alarm occurs, the NVR links the alarm output device to generate

an alarm. The alarm lasts a period of time depending on the defined

value for

Post-Alarm

●

Make sure that the alarm devices are connected to the alarm output

port of NVR.

●

Main Menu

ALARM

Alarm-out Port

, set the mode to

Auto

that the system can link the alarm output device to generate an

alarm.

Post-Alarm

Show Message Enable on-screen prompt when an alarm occurs.

Report Alarm

Enable the system to report the alarm to the alarm center.

Make sure that alarm center has been configured in

Main Menu

NETWORK

Alarm Center

Send Email

Enable the system to send an email to notify you when an alarm occurs.

Make sure that the email settings have been configured in

Main Menu

NETWORK

Record Channel When an alarm occurs, the system activates recording of the selected

channel. After the alarm ends, the recording continues for a period of

time depending on the defined value for

Post-Record

Make sure that intelligent recording schedule and auto recording have

been configured. For details, see "5.8.1 Recording Schedule".

Post-Record

PTZ Linkage

When an alarm occurs, the NVR associates the channel to perform the

corresponding PTZ action. For example, rotate the PTZ to the preset

point.

Make sure that PTZ actions have been configured. For details, see "5.6.7

PTZ".

Tour

When an alarm occurs, the local interface of the NVR displays the image

of the selected channels in turn.

Make sure that the time interval and mode for tour have been

configured in

Main Menu

DISPLAY

Tour Setting

User's Manual

246

Parameter Description

Picture Storage

When an alarm occurs, the system takes a snapshot of the channel and

stores the snapshot on the Device.

Make sure that snapshot schedule and snapshot mode have been

configured. For details, see "5.8.1 Recording Schedule".

Buzzer The system activates the buzzer when an alarm occurs.

Log When an alarm occurs, the system records the event in the logs.

Alarm Tone

When an alarm occurs, the system plays the selected audio file.

Make sure that the audio files have been uploaded to the system. For

details, see "5.18.1 File Management".

Step 8 Click

Apply

5.9.13.3 AI Search (SMD)

You can search for and play back videos that triggered SMD alarms.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

AI Search

SMD

Step 2 Select channel, type, start time and end time, and then click

●

Click to play back the video.

●

Select a video and click

Export

to export video file to a USB flash drive.

5.9.14 Vehicle Density

You can configure the rules for traffic congestion and parking upper limit, , and view the counting

data on the live page.

●

Traffic congestion: The system counts the vehicles in the detection area. When the counted

vehicle number and the continuous congestion time exceed the configured values, an alarm is

triggered and the system performs an alarm linkage.

●

Parking upper limit: The system counts the vehicles in the detection area. When the counted

vehicle number exceeds the configured value, an alarm triggered and the system performs an

alarm linkage.

5.9.14.1 Enabling Smart Plan

To use AI by camera, you need to enable the smart plan first. For details, see "5.9.2 Smart Plan".

5.9.14.2 Configuring Vehicle Density

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

Vehicle Density

User's Manual

247

Figure 5-160 Vehicle density

Step 2 Select a channel and then click

Add

Step 3 Select the

Enable

checkbox and then select a detection type.

Step 4 Click to draw the detection rule.

Step 5 Click under

Parameters

and then configure the parameters.

Step 6 Click under

Trigger

to configure alarm schedule and linkage.

Step 7 Click

Apply

5.9.14.3 Report Query

You can search for and export statistics on vehicle density.

●

The statistics might be overwritten when the storage space runs out. Back up in time.

●

When you restore the Device to factory settings, all the data except data in the external storage

device will be cleared. You can clear the data in the external storage device through formatting

or other methods.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Report Query

Vehicle Density

User's Manual

248

Figure 5-161 Vehicle density

Step 2 Select channel, report type, start and end time, and then click

Related Operations

●

Switch chart type.

Click

Bart Chart

Line Chart

to switch the chart type.

●

Export.

Select file type, and then click

Export

to export the report in picture or csv format.

5.9.15 Main-sub Tracking

Main-sub tracking refers to fisheye camera and speed dome linkage system. The fisheye camera

serves as the main camera and captures panoramic videos. The speed dome serves as the sub

camera and captures details of the video.

Prerequisites

●

The monitoring areas of fisheye camera and speed dome are the same area.

●

Fisheye camera and speed dome are added through private protocol.

This function is available on select models.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

Main-Sub Tracking

Step 2 Add monitoring area.

1) Click

Add

2) Configure parameters.

User's Manual

249

Table 5-44 Main-sub tracking parameters

Parameter Description

Type

Select a type according to the number of fisheye and PTZ cameras:

●

1 Fisheye + 1 PTZ.

●

1 Fisheye + 2 PTZ.

●

1 Fisheye + 3 PTZ.

Scene Name Customize the scene name.

Main Camera

Select a fisheye camera.

1. Click

Select

Main Camera

line.

2. Select a fisheye camera.

3. Click

Apply

Sub Camera

Select speed domes as needed.

1. Click

Select

Sub Camera

line.

2. Select speed domes.

3. Click

Apply

Step 3 Click

Apply

The monitoring area is successfully added.

Step 4 Configure calibration points to set the binding relationship of fisheye camera and speed

dome.

Set a distant place as the first calibration point to improve accuracy.

1) Click or double-click the target scene.

2) Click the target place on the video of fisheye camera, or move to the target place.

The video at upper-left corner is the fisheye camera screen, and the video at upper-

right corner is the speed dome screen.

3) Adjust position through the icons below the speed dome screen to make the center of

speed dome identical to the of fisheye camera.

The on the speed dome screen is the center of speed dome.

Table 5-45 Icon description

Icon Description

, Zoom in and zoom out.

, Adjust resolution.

, Adjust height.

Electronic mouse. You can use this icon to move the mouse to control

PTZ direction.

Quick positioning key. Click this icon to select a place, and the screen

will be focused and centered on the selected place.

4) Click

Add

User's Manual

250

The calibration point will be displayed on the list at lower-right corner.

Step 5 Click to save the newly added calibration point.

Step 6 Repeat Step 2 to Step 5 to add more calibration points.

Set 3–8 calibration points for a speed dome.

Step 7 Click

Apply

5.9.16 Video Quality Analytics

When conditions such as blurry, overexposure, or the color changes appear on the screen, the

system triggers the alarm.

●

This function takes effect only when the remote IPC supports video quality analytics.

●

This function is available on select models.

5.9.16.1 Configuring Video Quality Analytics

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

Video Quality Analytics

Step 2 Select a channel and click

Enable

Figure 5-162 Video quality analytics

Step 3 Click

Setting

next to

Rule

Step 4 Select items and set thresholds as needed.

User's Manual

251

Figure 5-163 Video quality analytics settings

The value range of threshold is 0–100, and the default value is 30. When the value exceeds

the set threshold, an alarm will be triggered.

Table 5-46 Video quality analytics parameters

Parameter Description

Stripe

Stripes refer to the striped interferences in the video which might be

due to device aging or signal interference. The stripe might be

horizontal, vertical, or oblique.

Noise

Video noise refers to the distortion of optical system or the

degradation of image quality caused by hardware equipment during

transmission.

Color Cast

An image in the video is generally a colorful image that contains color

information, such as RGB. When these three components appear at

some unusual scale in an image, the image is biased.

Defocus

An image with high resolution contains more details, but image blur is

a common problem of image quality decrease which is caused by

many factors in the process of image acquisition, transmission and

processing, and is defined as virtual focus in video diagnosis.

Overexpose

The brightness of the image refers to the intensity of the image pixels.

Black is the darkest and white is the brightest. Black is represented by 0

and white is represented by 255. When the brightness value exceeds

the threshold, the image is over exposed.

Step 5 Click

Step 6 Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the arming period.

The system triggers corresponding alarm actions only during the arming period.

●

On the time line, drag to set the period.

●

You can also click to set the period.

Step 7 Configure alarm linkage actions. For details, see Table 5-43.

Step 8 Click

Apply

User's Manual

252

5.9.16.2 Analytics List

Search for the results of video quality analytics.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

AI Search

Analytics List

Step 2 Select the start time and end time.

Step 3 Select one or more channels.

Step 4 Click

Figure 5-164 Analytics list

5.9.17 Entries Frequency

After setting entries frequency, when the entries detected of a person reach or exceed the threshold,

an alarm is triggered.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

Parameters

Face Recognition

Entries Frequency

User's Manual

253

Figure 5-165 Entries frequency

Step 2 Click

Setting

to select a database and then click

Step 3 Click and then configure the parameters.

User's Manual

254

Figure 5-166 Configure entries frequency

Table 5-47 Entries frequency parameters

Parameter Description

Statistical Cycle Set the cycle for counting the entries frequency.

Entries Detected

Set the threshold of entries frequency. When the entries detected

reaches or exceeds the threshold, an alarm is triggered.

Alarm Name The name is

Entries Frequency

by default. You can change the name.

Step 4 Click

Apply

5.10 Alarm Settings

5.10.1 Alarm Information

You can search for, view and back up the alarm information.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

ALARM

Alarm Info

User's Manual

255

Figure 5-167 Alarm information

Step 2 Select the event type, and then set the search period.

Step 3 Click

The search results are displayed.

Related Operations

●

Play back alarm videos.

Select an alarm event log, click to play the recorded video of alarm event.

●

Back up.

Select an alarm event log and then click

Backup

to back up it to peripheral USB device.

●

View alarm details.

Double-click a log or click

Details

to view the detailed information of the event.

5.10.2 Alarm Status

You can view NVR alarm event, and remote channel alarm event.

Select

Main Menu

ALARM

Alarm Status

User's Manual

256

Figure 5-168 Alarm status

5.10.3 Alarm Input

Step 1 Select

Main menu

ALARM

Alarm-in Port

Step 2 Click each tab to configure alarm input settings.

●

Local alarm: After connect the alarm device to the NVR alarm input port, the system

performs alarm linkage actions when there is an alarm signal from the alarm input port

to the NVR.

●

Alarm box: You can connect the alarm box to the RS-485 port of the Device. When the

alarm is detected by the alarm box, the alarm information will be uploaded to the

Device, and then the Device performs alarm linkage actions.

●

Network alarm: NVR performs alarm linkage actions when it receives the alarm signal

via the network transmission.

●

IPC external alarm: When the peripheral device connected to the camera has triggered

an alarm, the camera uploads the alarm signal to the NVR via the network transmission.

The system performs the corresponding alarm linkage actions.

●

IPC offline alarm: When the network connection between the NVR and the network

camera is off, the system performs alarm linkage actions.

User's Manual

257

Figure 5-169 Local alarm

Step 3 Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the alarm schedule.

Step 4 Configure the anti-dither period.

If multiple alarms occur during the anti-dither period, the system only record the event

once.

Step 5 Configure alarm linkage. For details, see Table 5-43.

Step 6 Enable

Disarming

so that you can connect a switch to the alarm input port for disarming

control.

Step 7 Click

Apply

5.10.4 Alarm Output

You can set proper alarm output mode to auto, manual or off. After you connect the alarm device to

the alarm output port of NVR, and set the mode to auto, the system performs alarm linkage actions

when an alarm occurs.

●

Auto: Once an alarm event occurs, the system generates an alarm.

●

Manual: Alarm device is always on the alarming mode.

●

Off: Disable alarm output function.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

ALARM

Alarm-out Port

User's Manual

258

Figure 5-170 Alarm-out port

Step 2 Select the alarm mode of the alarm output channel.

Step 3 Click

Apply

●

Click

next to

Alarm Reset

to clear all alarm output statuses.

●

View the alarm output status on the

Status

column.

5.10.5 Video Detection

The system can analyze the video and check whether there is considerable change or not. Once

video has changed considerably (for example, there is any moving object, video is distorted), the

system performs alarm linkage actions.

5.10.5.1 Motion Detection

When the moving object appears and moves fast enough to reach the preset sensitivity value, the

system performs alarm linkage actions.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

ALARM

Video Detection

Motion Detection

User's Manual

259

Figure 5-171 Motion detection

Step 2 Select a channel and then click to enable the function.

Step 3 Configure the detection region.

1) Click

Setting

next to

Region

2) Point to the middle top of the page.

3) Select one region, for example, click .

4) Drag on the screen to select the region that you want to detect.

5) Configure the parameters.

Table 5-48 Detection region parameters

Parameter Description

Name Enter a name for the region.

Sensitivity

Every region has an individual sensitivity value.

The bigger the value is, the easier to trigger an alarm.

Threshold

Adjust the threshold for motion detection. Every region of every channel

has an individual threshold.

You can configurer up to four detection regions. When any one of the four regions

activates motion detection alarm, the channel where this region belongs to will

activate motion detection alarm.

User's Manual

260

6) Right-click the page to exit.

Step 4 Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the alarm schedule.

Step 5 Configure the anti-dither period.

If multiple alarms occur during the anti-dither period, the system only record the event

once.

Step 6 Configure alarm linkage. For details, see Table 5-43.

Step 7 Click

Apply

5.10.5.2 Video Loss

When the video loss occurs, the system performs alarm linkage actions.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

ALARM

Video Detection

Video Loss

Figure 5-172 Video Loss

Step 2 Select a channel and then click to enable the function.

Step 3 Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the alarm schedule.

Step 4 Configure alarm linkage. For details, see Table 5-43.

Step 5 Click

Apply

User's Manual

261

5.10.5.3 Video Tampering

When the camera lens is covered, or the video is displayed in a single color because of sunlight

status, the monitoring cannot be continued normally. To avoid such situations, you can configure

the tampering alarm settings.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

ALARM

Video Detection

Video Tampering

Figure 5-173 Video tampering

Step 2 Select a channel and then click to enable the function.

Step 3 Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the alarm schedule.

Step 4 Configure alarm linkage. For details, see Table 5-43.

Step 5 Click

Apply

5.10.5.4 Scene Change

When the detected scene has changed, system performs alarm linkage actions.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

ALARM

Video Detection

Scene Changing

User's Manual

262

Figure 5-174 Scene changing

Step 2 Select a channel and then click to enable the function.

Step 3 Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the alarm schedule.

Step 4 Configure alarm linkage. For details, see Table 5-43.

Step 5 Click

Apply

5.10.5.5 PIR Alarm

PIR function helps enhancing the accuracy and validity of motion detect. It can filter the meaningless

alarms that are activated by the objects such as falling leaves and flies. The detection range by PIR is

smaller than the field angle.

PIR function is enabled by default if it is supported by the cameras. Enabling PIR function will get the

motion detection to be enabled automatically to generate motion detection alarms.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

ALARM

Video Detection

PIR

User's Manual

263

Figure 5-175 PIR

Step 2 Select a channel and then click to enable the function.

Step 3 Configure the detection region.

1) Click

Setting

next to

Region

2) Point to the middle top of the page.

3) Select one region, for example, click .

4) Drag on the screen to select the region that you want to detect.

5) Configure the parameters.

Table 5-49 Detection region parameters

Parameter Description

Name Enter a name for the region.

Sensitivity

Every region of every channel has an individual sensitivity value.

The bigger the value is, the easier to trigger an alarm.

Threshold

Adjust the threshold for motion detection. Every region of every channel

has an individual threshold.

You can configure up to four detection regions. When any one of the four regions

activates an alarm, the channel where this region belongs to will activate an alarm.

6) Right-click to exit the page.

User's Manual

264

Step 4 Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the alarm schedule.

Step 5 Configure the anti-dither period.

If multiple alarms occur during the anti-dither period, the system only record the event

once.

Step 6 Configure alarm linkage. For details, see Table 5-43.

Step 7 Click

Apply

5.10.6 Audio Detection

The system can generate an alarm once it detects the audio is not clear, the tone color has changed

or there is abnormal or audio volume change.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

ALARM

Audio Detection

Step 2 Select a channel and then click to enable detection of audio exception and

intensity change.

●

Audio Exception

: The system generates an alarm when the audio input is abnormal.

●

Intensity Change

: Set the sensitivity and threshold. An alarm is triggered when the

change in sound intensity exceeds the defined threshold.

Step 3 Click

Setting

next to

Schedule

to configure the alarm schedule.

Step 4 Configure alarm linkage. For details, see Table 5-43.

Step 5 Click

Apply

5.10.7 Thermal Alarm

After receiving the alarm signal from the connected thermal devices, the system can recognize the

alarm type, and then trigger the corresponding alarm actions.

The system supports heat alarm, temperature (temperature difference) and cold/hot alarm.

●

Heat alarm: The system generates an alarm once it detects there is a fire.

●

Temperature (temperature difference): The system triggers an alarm once the temperature

difference between two positions is higher or below the specified threshold.

●

Cold/hot alarm: The system triggers an alarm once the detected position temperature is higher

or below the specified threshold.

●

Make sure that the connected camera supports temperature monitoring function.

●

This function is available on select models.

●

The thermal detection functions might vary depending on the connected camera. This section

uses heat alarm as an example.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

ALARM

Thermal Alarm

User's Manual

265

Figure 5-176 Thermal alarm

Step 2 Select a channel and set alarm type to heat alarm, and then enable the function.

Step 3 Select fire mode. The system supports preset mode and zone excluded mode.

●

Preset mode: Select a preset and then enable the function. The system generates an

alarm once it detects there is a fire.

●

Zone excluded mode: The system filters the specified high temperature zone. The

system generates an alarm once the rest zone has fire.

Step 4 Configure alarm linkage. For details, see Table 5-43.

Step 5 Click

Apply

5.10.8 Exception

When an error in HDD, network, and device occurs, the system performs alarm linkage actions.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

ALARM

Exception

User's Manual

266

Figure 5-177 Disk exception

Step 2 Click each tab and then select an event type.

●

Disk

: The system detects HDD error, no HDD, no space, and other HDD events.

●

Network

: The system detects network errors such as disconnection, IP conflict, and

MAC conflict.

●

Device

: The system detects device errors such as abnormal fan speed and network

security error.

Step 3 Click to enable the function.

Step 4 (Optional) If the event type is

Low Space

, you need to configure the threshold of storage

space.

When the storage space is lower than the threshold, an alarm is triggered.

Step 5 Configure alarm linkage. For details, see Table 5-43.

Step 6 Click

Apply

5.10.9 Disarming

You can disarm all alarm linkage actions as needed through one click.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

ALARM

Disarming

Step 2 Select

for

Disarming

to enable disarming.

User's Manual

267

Figure 5-178 Disarming

Step 3 (Optional) To enable scheduled disarming, click

Setting

next to

Duration of Disarm by

Period

, and then set periods.

Scheduled disarming is only effective when

Disarming

Off

Figure 5-179 Scheduled disarming

●

Drag your mouse to select time blocks.

●

Green blocks indicates that disarming is enabled.

●

You can also click to set time periods. One day can have 6 periods at most.

Step 4 Select the alarm linkage actions to disarm.

All alarm linkage actions will be disarmed if you select

All

Step 5 To disarm remote channels, select the checkbox at

Channel

, and then click

Setting

select channels.

User's Manual

268

This function is only effective when the connected camera supports one-click disarming.

Step 6 Click

Apply

5.11 Network

Configure the network settings to ensure the Device can communicate with other devices on the

same LAN.

5.11.1 TCP/IP

You can configure the settings for the Device such as IP address, DNS according to the networking

plan.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

NETWORK

TCP/IP

Figure 5-180 TCP/IP

Step 2 Click to configure the NIC card, and then click

User's Manual

269

Figure 5-181 TCP/IP

Table 5-50 TCP/IP parameters

Parameter Description

Network Mode

●

Single NIC

: The current NIC card works independently. If the current

NIC card is disconnected, the Device becomes offline.

●

Fault Tolerance

: Two NIC cards share one IP address. Normally only

one NIC card is working. When this card fails, the other NIC card will

start working automatically to ensure the network connection. The

Device is regarded as offline only when both NIC cards are

disconnected.

●

Load Balance

: Two NIC cards share one IP address and work at the

same time to share the network load averagely. When one NIC card

fails, the other card continues to work normally. The Device is

regarded as offline only when both NIC cards are disconnected.

The Device with single Ethernet port does not support this function.

NIC Member

When the network mode is

Fault Tolerance

Load Balance

, you need

to select the checkbox to bind NIC cards.

●

Make sure that at least two NIC cards are installed.

●

NIC cards using different ports such as optical port and electrical port

cannot be bound together.

●

After binding NIC cards, you need to restart the Device to make the

change effective.

IP Version Select IPv4 or IPv6. Both versions are supported for access.

User's Manual

270

Parameter Description

MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the Device.

DHCP

Enable the system to allocate a dynamic IP address to the Device. There is

no need to set IP address manually.

●

If you want to manually configure the IP information, disable the

DHCP function first.

●

If PPPoE connection is successful, the IP address, subnet mask,

default gateway, and DHCP are not available for configuration.

IP Address Enter the IP address and configure the corresponding subnet mask and

default gateway.

●

The IP address and default gateway must be on the same network

segment.

●

Click

Test

to check whether the IP address is available.

Subnet Mask

Default Gateway

MTU Displays the MTU value of the NIC card.

Step 3 On the

TCP/IP

page, configure the DNS server.

This step is compulsive if you want to use the domain service.

●

Obtain DNS server automatically.

When there is DHCP server on the network, you can enable

DHCP

so that the Device

can automatically obtain a dynamic IP address.

●

Configure DNS server manually.

Select the IP version, and then enter the IP addresses of preferred and alternate DNS

server.

Step 4 Select a NIC card as the default card.

Step 5 Click

Apply

5.11.2 Routing Table

You can configure the routing table so that the system can automatically calculate the best path for

data transmission.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

NETWORK

TCP/IP

Routing Table

User's Manual

271

Figure 5-182 Routing table

Step 2 Add the routing table.

●

Auto add.

When you add a camera to the NVR and the IP address of the camera is not on the

existing routing table, the system will add the routing information.

●

Manual add.

Configure the parameters such as destination address, netmask, and gateway, and then

click

Add

◇

The destination address and netmask must not be on the same LAN.

◇

The netmask must be valid and on the same LAN with the NIC card.

◇

You can configure up to eight pieces of routing information.

Step 3 Click

Apply

5.11.3 Port

You can configure the maximum connection for accessing the Device from web, platform, mobile

phone or other clients at the same time, and configure each port number.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

NETWORK

Port

User's Manual

272

Figure 5-183 Port

Step 2 Configure the parameters.

The parameters except

Max Connection

take effect after the Device restarts.

Table 5-51 Port parameters

Parameter Description

Max Connection

The allowable maximum clients accessing the Device at the same time,

such as web client, platform, and mobile client.

TCP Port

Transmission control protocol port. Enter the value according to your

actual situation.

UDP Port

User datagram protocol port. Enter the value according to your actual

situation.

HTTP Port

The default value setting is 80. You can enter the value according to your

actual situation.

If you change the HTTP port number to, for example, 70, then you need to

enter 70 after the IP address when logging in to the Device through the

browser.

HTTPS Port

HTTPS communication port. The default value is 443. You can enter the

value according to your actual situation.

RTSP Port

The default value is 554. You can enter the value according to your actual

situation.

POS Port

POS data transmission port. The value range from 1 through 65535. The

default value is 38800.

Step 3 Click

Apply

5.11.4 External Wi-Fi

The Device can be connected to wireless network with an external Wi-Fi module.

Prerequisites

User's Manual

273

Make sure that external Wi-Fi module is installed on the Device.

This function is available on select models.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

NETWORK

Wi-Fi

Figure 5-184 Wi-Fi

Step 2 Configure the parameters.

Table 5-52 Wi-Fi parameters

Parameter Description

Connect

Automatically

After the function is enabled, the NVR will connect to the nearest site that

was previously successfully connected after the Device starts.

Refresh Search for the sites again.

Disconnect Disconnect the current connection.

Connect

Select an available site and then click

Connect

Step 3 Click

Apply.

●

After the connection is successful, a Wi-Fi connection signal flag appears in the upper-

right corner of the live view page.

●

The Wi-Fi module models currently supported are D-LINK, dongle and EW-7811UTC

User's Manual

274

wireless cards.

5.11.5 Wi-Fi AP

You can configure Wi-Fi parameters for the NVR to ensure that a wireless IPC can connect to the NVR

through Wi-Fi AP.

This function requires the built-in Wi-Fi module in the Device.

5.11.5.1 General Settings

You can configure SSID, encryption type, password and channel of the device.

●

This function is supported on select wireless models.

●

When the wireless IPC and NVR are matched, the pairing will be completed in 120 seconds after

they are powered on.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

NETWORK

Wi-Fi AP

General

Figure 5-185 General settings

Step 2 Select

Wi-Fi

to enable Wi-Fi.

Step 3 Configure parameters.

User's Manual

275

Table 5-53 Parameters of general settings

Parameter Description

SSID Wi-Fi name for the device.

Hide SSID Hide the Wi-Fi name.

Encryption Type Select an encryption mode from WPA2 PSK and WPA PSK.

Password Set the Wi-Fi password for the Device.

Select Channel Select the channel for device communication.

Network Proxy Enable the external network access through the Device for a wireless IPC.

Step 4 Click

Apply

5.11.5.2 Advanced Settings

This function is supported on select wireless models.

You can configure IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, DHCP server of the Device.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

NETWORK

Wi-Fi AP

Advanced

Figure 5-186 Advanced settings

Step 2 Configure parameters.

User's Manual

276

Table 5-54 Parameters of advanced settings

Parameter Description

IP Address Set IP address, subnet mask and default gateway for the Wi-Fi of NVR.

IP address and default gateway must be on the same network

segment.

Subnet Mask

Default Gateway

Start IP

Set the start IP address and end IP address of the DHCP server.

End IP

Preferred DNS

Set preferred and alternate DNS server address.

Alternate DNS

Step 3 Click

Apply

5.11.6 3G/4G

Prerequisites

Make sure that 3G/4G module is installed on the device.

This function is available on select models.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

NETWORK

3G/4G

Figure 5-187 3G/4G

The page is divided into three main areas:

●

Zone 1 displays a 3G/4G signal indication.

●

Zone 2 displays 3G/4G module configuration information.

User's Manual

277

●

Zone 3 displays the status information of the 3G/4G module.

Zone 2 displays the corresponding information when the 3G/4G module is connected,

while Zone 1 and Zone 3 will only display the corresponding content when the 3G/4G is

enabled.

Step 2 Configure parameters.

Table 5-55 3G/4G parameters

Parameter Description

NIC Name Select a NIC name.

Network Type.

Select a 3G/4G network type to distinguish between 3G/4G modules

from different vendors.

APN, Dial-up No. Main parameters of PPP dial.

Authentication Type

Select PAP, CHAP or NO_AUTH. NO_AUTH represents no

authentication for 3G/4G.

Step 3 Click

Apply

5.11.7 Cellular Network

Connect the Device to mobile network and view network status and traffic of the cellular network.

Prerequisites

A SIM card is inserted in the recorder.

This function is available on select models.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

NETWORK

Cellular Network

Step 2 Enable cellular network and configure parameters.

User's Manual

278

Figure 5-188 Configuring cellular network

Table 5-56 4G cellular network parameters

Parameter Description

NIC Name Select a NIC.

Network Type Select a network from the SIM card provider.

APN, Dial-up No. The two main parameters of PPP dial-up connection.

Authentication Type

Select

PAP

CHAP

NO-AUTH

Username The username for dial-up connection.

Password The password for dial-up connection.

Step 3 Click

Apply

Related Operations

●

View network status.

Click the

Status

tab to check cellular network status such as IP address, SIM card status and dial-

up status.

User's Manual

279

Figure 5-189 Network status

●

View data traffic.

Click the

Data Traffic

tab to view the daily and monthly data usage.

Figure 5-190 Cellular data usage

5.11.8 Repeater

The Device supports settings for the wireless repeater IPC to extend video transmission distance and

range.

Prerequisites

●

The Device has the built-in Wi-Fi module.

User's Manual

280

●

The IPC has wireless repeater module.

This function is available on select models.

Procedure

Step 1 Power on the NVR and wireless repeater IPC, and connect all IPCs to the NVR through Wi-Fi.

Step 2 Select

Main Menu

NETWORK

REPEATER

●

Green connection line represents the successful connection between channel and

wireless IPC.

●

Auto cascade: After selecting auto cascade, the IPC can cascade to NVR automatically.

Figure 5-191 Repeater

Step 3 Select

Manual Cascade

You can use manual cascade when there are at least two IPCs on the network.

User's Manual

281

Figure 5-192 Manual cascade

Step 4 Click and select the channel to be added.

Figure 5-193 Added channel

Step 5 Click

Apply

5.11.9 PPPoE

PPPoE is another way for the Device to access the network. You can establish network connection by

configuring PPPoE settings to give the Device a dynamic IP address on the WAN.

To use this function, firstly you need to obtain the username and password from the Internet Service

User's Manual

282

Provider.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

NETWORK

PPPoE

Figure 5-194 PPPoE

Step 2 Enable the PPPoE function.

Step 3 Enter the username and password provided by the Internet Service Provider.

Step 4 Click

Apply

The IP address appears on the PPPoE page. You can use this IP address to access the

Device.

When the PPPoE function is enabled, the IP address on the

TCP/IP

page cannot be

modified.

5.11.10 DDNS

When the IP address of the Device changes frequently, the DDNS function can dynamically refresh

the correspondence between the domain on DNS and the IP address. You can access the Device by

using the domain.

Check the type of DDNS that the Device supports and then log in to the website provided by the

DDNS service provider to register domain and other information.

After registration, you can log in to the DDNS website to view the information of all the connected

devices under the registered account.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

NETWORK

DDNS

User's Manual

283

Figure 5-195 DDNS

Step 2 Enable DDNS and then configure the parameters.

After you enable DDNS function, the third-party server might collect your device

information.

Table 5-57 DDNS parameters

Parameter Description

Type Displays the type and address of DDNS service provider.

●

For

Dyndns DDNS

, the default address is members.dyndns.org.

●

For

NO-IP DDNS

, the default address is dynupdate.no-ip.com.

●

For

CN99 DDNS

, the default address is members.3322.org.

Server Address

Domain Name

Enter the domain name that you have registered on the website of DDNS

service provider.

Username Enter the username and password obtained from DDNS service provider.

You need to register the username, password and other information on

the website of DDNS service provider.

Password

Interval Enter the interval at which you want to update the DDNS.

Step 3 Click

Apply

Enter the domain name in the browser on your computer, and then press the Enter key. If

the web interface of the Device is displayed, the configuration is successful. If not, the

configuration failed.

5.11.11 UPnP

You can map the relationship between the LAN and the WAN to access the Device on the LAN

through the IP address on the WAN.

5.11.11.1 Configuring Router

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the router to set the WAN port to enable the IP address to connect into the WAN.

User's Manual

284

Step 2 Enable the UPnP function on the router.

Step 3 Connect the Device with the LAN port on the router to connect into the LAN.

Step 4 Select

Main Menu

NETWORK

TCP/IP

, configure the IP address into the router IP

address range, or enable the DHCP function to obtain an IP address automatically.

5.11.11.2 Configuring UPnP

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

NETWORK

UPnP

Figure 5-196 UPnP

Step 2 Configure the settings for the UPnP parameters.

Table 5-58 UPnP parameters

Parameter Description

Port Mapping Enable the UPnP function.

Status

Indicates the status of UPnP function.

●

Offline: Failed.

●

Online: Succeeded.

LAN IP

Enter IP address of router on the LAN.

After mapping succeeded, the system obtains IP address automatically.

WAN IP

Enter IP address of router on the WAN.

After mapping succeeded, the system obtains IP address automatically.

User's Manual

285

Parameter Description

Port Mapping

List

The settings on port mapping list correspond to the UPnP port mapping list on

the router.

●

Service Name: Name of network server.

●

Protocol: Type of protocol.

●

Internal Port: Internal port that is mapped on the Device.

●

External Port: External port that is mapped on the router.

●

To avoid the conflict, when setting the external port, try to use the ports

from 1024 through 5000 and avoid popular ports from 1 through 255 and

system ports from 256 through 1023.

●

When there are several devices on the LAN, properly arrange the ports

mapping relations to avoid mapping to the same external port.

●

When establishing a mapping relationship, ensure the mapping ports are

not occupied or limited.

●

The internal and external ports of TCP and UDP must be the same and

cannot be modified.

●

Click to modify the external port.

Step 3 Click

Apply

to complete the settings.

In the browser, enter http://WAN IP: External IP port. You can visit the Device on the LAN.

5.11.12 Email

You can configure the email settings to enable the system to send the email as a notification when

an alarm event occurs.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

NETWORK

User's Manual

286

Figure 5-197 Email

Step 2 Click to enable the function.

Step 3 Configure the email parameters.

Table 5-59 Email parameters

Parameter Description

SMTP Server Enter the address of SMTP server of sender’s email account.

Port Enter the port of SMTP server. The default value is 25.

Username

Enter the username and password of sender’s email account.

Password

Anonymous Enable anonymous login.

Receiver

Select the receiver to receive the notification. You can select up to three

receivers.

Email Address Enter the email address of mail receivers.

Sender

Enter the sender’s email address. You can enter up to three senders

separated by comma.

Subject

Enter the email subject.

You can enter Chinese, English and numerals with the length limited to

64 characters.

Attachment

Enable the attachment function. When there is an alarm event, the

system can attach snapshots as an attachment to the email.

Encryption Type

Select the encryption type from

NONE

SSL

, or

TLS

For SMTP server, the default encryption type is

TLS

User's Manual

287

Parameter Description

Interval (Sec.)

Set the interval at which the system sends an email for the same type of

alarm event to avoid excessive pileup of emails caused by frequent

alarm events.

The value ranges from 0 to 3600. 0 means that there is no interval.

Health Mail

Enable the health test function. The system can send a test email to

check the connection.

Sending Interval

Set the interval at which the system sends a health test email.

The value ranges from 30 to 1440. 0 means that there is no interval.

Test

Click

Test

to test the email sending function. If the configuration is

correct, the receiver’s email account will receive the email.

Before testing, click

Apply

to save the settings.

Step 4 Click

Apply

5.11.13 SNMP

You can connect the Device with some software such as MIB Builder and MG-SOFT MIB Browser to

manage and control the Device from the software.

Prerequisites

●

Install the software that can manage and control the SNMP, such as MIB Builder and MG-SOFT

MIB Browser

●

Obtain the MIB files that correspond to the current version from the technical support.

This function is available on select models.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

NETWORK

SNMP

User's Manual

288

Figure 5-198 SNMP

Step 2 Click to enable the function.

Step 3 Configure the parameters.

Table 5-60 SNMP parameters

Parameter Description

Version

Select the checkbox of SNMP version that you are using.

The default version is

. There is a risk if you use V1 or V2.

SNMP Port Enter the monitoring port on the agent program.

Read Community

Enter the read and write strings supported by the agent program.

Write Community

Trap Address

Enter the destination address for the agent program to send the Trap

information.

Trap Port

Enter the destination port for the agent program to send the Trap

information.

Read-Only

Username

Enter the username that is allowed to access the Device and has the

read-only permission.

Read/Write

Username

Enter the username that is allowed to access the Device and has the read

and write permission.

Authentication Type Select MD5 or SHA. The system recognizes the type automatically.

Authentication

Password

Enter the password for authentication. The password should be no less

than eight characters.

User's Manual

289

Parameter Description

Encryption Type Select an encryption type. The default setting is CBC-DES.

Encryption Password Enter the encryption password.

Step 4 Click

Apply

Step 5 Compile the two MIB files by MIB Builder.

Step 6 Run MG-SOFT MIB Browser to load in the module from compilation.

Step 7 On the MG-SOFT MIB Browser, enter the device IP that you want to manage, and then

select the version number to query.

Step 8 On the MG-SOFT MIB Browser, unfold the tree-structured directory to obtain the

configurations of the Device, such as the channels quantity and software version.

5.11.14 Multicast

When you access the Device from the network to view the video, if the access is exceeded, the video

will not display. You can use the multicast function to group the IP to solve the problem.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

NETWORK

Multicast

Figure 5-199 Multicast

Step 2 Configure the parameters.

Table 5-61 Multicast parameters

Parameter Description

Enable Enable the multicast function.

User's Manual

290

Parameter Description

IP Address

Enter the IP address that you want to use as the multicast IP.

The IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 through 239.255.255.255.

Port

Enter the port for the multicast. The port ranges from 1025 through

65000.

Step 3 Click

Apply

You can log in to the web interface via multicast.

On the web login page, on the

Type

list, select

Multicast

. The web will automatically

obtain the multicast IP address and join the multicast group. Then you can view the video

through multicast function.

5.11.15 Alarm Center

You can configure the alarm center server to receive the uploaded alarm information.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

NETWORK

Alarm Center

Figure 5-200 Alarm center

Step 2 Click to enable the function.

Step 3 Configure the parameters.

Table 5-62 Alarm center parameters

Parameter Description

Protocol Type Select a protocol type.

Server Address

The IP address and communication port of the PC installed with alarm

User's Manual

291

Parameter Description

Port

client.

Auto Report Plan Select time cycle and specific time for uploading alarm.

Step 4 Click

Apply

5.11.16 Register

You can register the Device into the specified proxy server which acts as the transit to enable the

client software to access the Device

●

The proxy server has been deployed.

●

The Device, the proxy server and the device running the client software are on the same network.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

NETWORK

Figure 5-201 Register

Step 2 Click to enable the function.

Step 3 Configure the parameters.

Table 5-63 Register parameters

Function Description

Server Address

Enter the IP address or domain name of the server that you want to

Port Enter the port of the server.

Sub-Device ID Enter the ID allocated by the server.

Step 4 Click

Apply

User's Manual

292

5.11.17 Switch

After setting

Switch

, when an IPC is connected to the PoE port, the system automatically assigns the

IP address to the IPC according to the defined IP segment, and the NVR will automatically connect to

the IPC.

●

Only models with PoE ports support this function.

●

Do not connect the PoE port with a switch, otherwise it will cause connection failure.

●

This function is enabled by default, and the IP segment start from 10.1.1.1. We recommend you

use the default setting.

●

When connecting to a third-party IPC, make sure that the IPC supports ONVIF protocol and DHCP

is enabled.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

NETWORK

Switch

Figure 5-202 Switch

Step 2 Configure IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway..

Do not set the IP address to the same network segment with the NVR. We recommend you

use the default setting.

Step 3 Click

Apply

When connecting IP camera to PoE port, if all the channels are occupied, the system prompts you

whether to take place of one channel.

User's Manual

293

Table 5-64 PoE operation

PoE operation Description

Connect to PoE port

When an IPC is connected to the PoE port, the system automatically

assigns the IP address to the IPC according to the set IP segment. The

NVR will try the method of arp ping to assign the IP address. If DHCP is

enabled on the NVR, the NVR will use DHCP to assign the IP address.

●

When IP address is successfully set, the system will broadcast

through the switch function. If there is a response from the IPC, it

means the connection is successful, and the NVR will log in to the

IPC. You can find the corresponding channel occupied and there is a

PoE icon at the upper-left corner.

●

You can also view PoE status such as channel number and PoE port

number on the

Added Device

list in

Main Menu

CAMERA

Camera List

Disconnect PoE port

When an IPC is disconnected form PoE port, you will find the

information of

Failed to find network host

on the live channel window.

PoE connection

mapping

The PoE ports are bound to corresponding channels. When an IPC is

connected to PoE port 1, the corresponding channel is Channel 1.

5.11.18 P2P

P2P is a kind of convenient private network penetration technology. Instead of applying for dynamic

domain name, mapping ports or deploying transit server, you can add NVR devices to the app for

remote management.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

NETWORK

P2P

User's Manual

294

Figure 5-203 P2P

Step 2 Enable the P2P function.

After you enable the P2P function and connect to the Internet, the system will collect the

information such as email address and MAC address for remote access.

Step 3 Click

Apply

The P2P function is enabled. You can use your phone to scan the QR code under

Mobile

Client

to download and install the mobile client. After that, you can use the mobile client

to scan the QR code under

Device SN

to add the Device for remote management. For

details on the app operation, see the user's manual of the app.

5.12 Storage

You can manage the storage resources (such as record file) and storage space. So that it is easy for

you to use and enhance storage space usage.

5.12.1 Basic

You can set basic storage parameters.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

STORAGE

Basic

User's Manual

295

Figure 5-204 Basic storage

Step 2 Set parameters.

Table 5-65 Basic storage parameters

Parameter Description

Disk Full

Configure the storage strategy to be used when no more storage space is

available

●

Stop

: Stop recording.

●

Overwrite

: The newest files overwrite the oldest ones.

Create Video Files Configure the time length and file length for each recorded video.

Delete Expired Files

Configure whether to delete the old files.

●

Select

Auto

and then configure how long you want to keep the old

files.

●

Select

Never

if you do not want to use this function.

Deleted files cannot be recovered.

Sleep Strategy

●

Auto

: The system sleeps automatically after idling for a period of

time.

●

Never

: The system keeps running all the time.

Step 3 Click

Apply

5.12.2 Disk Manager

Select

Main Menu

STORAGE

Disk Manager

, and then you can set HDD properties and format

HDD.

User's Manual

296

Figure 5-205 Disk manager

View HDD Information

You can view the physical position, properties, status and storage capacity of each HDD.

Configure HDD Properties

In the

Properties

column, you can set read and wire, read-only and redundant HDD.

When there are two or more HDDs installed on the Device, you can set one HDD as redundant disk

to back up recorded files.

Format HDD

Select an HDD, click

Format

, and then follow the on-screen prompts to format the HDD.

●

Formatting will erase all data in the HDD, proceed with caution.

●

You can select whether to erase the HDD database. If the HDD database is erased, the AI search

data and the uploaded audio files will be deleted.

5.12.3 RAID

RAID (redundant array of independent disks) is a data storage virtualization technology that

combines multiple physical HDD components into a single logical unit for the purposes of data

redundancy, performance improvement, or both.

User's Manual

297

RAID function is available on select models.

Table 5-66 Disk quantity for different RAID types

RAID type Required disk quantity

RAID 0 At least 2.

RAID 1 Only 2.

RAID 5 At least 3. We recommend using 4 disks to 6 disks.

RAID 6

At least 4.

RAID 10

5.12.3.1 Creating RAID

RAID has different levels, such as RAID 5 and RAID 6. Each level has different data protection, data

availability, and performance grade. You can create different types of RAID as needed.

When you create RAID, the disks in the RAID group will be formatted. Back up data in time.

You can create different types of RAID as needed.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

STORAGE

RAID

User's Manual

298

Figure 5-206 RAID

Step 2 Select RAID type and working mode.

The working mode determines how the system allocate resources.

●

Self-Adaptive

: Automatically adjust the RAID synchronization speed according to the

business status.

◇

When there is no business running, synchronization is performed at a high speed.

◇

When there is business running, synchronization is performed at a low speed.

●

Sync First

: Resource priority is assigned to RAID synchronization.

●

Business First

: Resource priority is assigned to business operations.

●

Balance

: Resource is evenly distributed to RAID synchronization and business

operations.

Step 3 Create RAID.

●

Automatic creation.

Select disks, and then click

Create RAID

. The system will create RAID 5 automatically.

Automatic creation of RAID is available only when the RAID type is

Raid5

●

Manual creation.

Select disks, click

Create Manually

and then follow the on-screen instructions to create

RAID.

●

Change working mode.

User's Manual

299

Click to change the working mode of the RAID group.

●

Delete RAID.

Click to delete the RAID group.

When you delete a RAID group, the disks in the RAID group will be formatted.

5.12.3.2 Viewing RAID Information

Select

Main Menu

STORAGE

RAID

RAID Info

. You can view the RAID information, including

type, disk space, hot spare, and status.

5.12.3.3 Creating Hot Spare Disk

You can create a hot spare disk. When a disk of the RAID group malfunctions, the hot spare disk can

replace the malfunctioning disk.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

STORAGE

RAID

Hotspare Disk

Figure 5-207 Hotspare disk

Step 2 Click .

Figure 5-208 Local hotspare

User's Manual

300

Figure 5-209 Global hotspare

Step 3 You can select

Local Hotspare

Global Hotspare

●

Local Hotspare

: Select the target disk, and the current disk will serve as the hot spare

disk for the selected target disk.

●

Global Hotspare

: The current disk will serve as the hot spare disk of the entire RAID.

Step 4 Click

Click to delete a hot spare disk.

5.12.4 Disk Group

By default, the installed HDD and created RAID are in Disk Group 1. You can set HDD group, and HDD

group setup for main stream, sub stream and snapshot operation.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

STORAGE

Disk Group

User's Manual

301

Figure 5-210 Disk group

Step 2 (Optional) If

Disk Quota is selected

is shown on the page, click

Switch to Disk Group

Mode

and then follow the on-screen instructions to format disks.

Step 3 Select the group for each HDD, and then click

Apply

After configuring HDD group, under the

Main Stream

tab,

Sub Stream

tab and

Snapshot

tab, configure settings to save the main stream, sub stream and snapshot to different disk

groups.

5.12.5 Disk Quota

You can allocate a certain storage capacity for each channel to manage the storage space properly.

●

Disk group mode selected.

is shown in the interface, click

Switch to Quota Mode.

●

Disk quota mode and disk group mode can not be selected at the same time.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

STORAGE

Disk Quota

User's Manual

302

Figure 5-211 Disk Quota

Step 2 (Optional) If

Disk group mode selected

is shown on the page, click

Switch to Quota

Mode

and then follow the on-screen instructions to format disks.

Step 3 Select a channel and set the record duration, bit rate and storage capacity of picture.

Step 4 Click

Apply

5.12.6 Disk Check

The system can detect HDD status so that you can clearly understand the HDD performance and

replace the malfunctioning HDD.

5.12.6.1 Manual Check

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

STORAGE

Disk Check

Manual Check

User's Manual

303

Figure 5-212 Manual check

Step 2 Select the detection type.

●

Key area detection: The system detects the used space of the HDD through the built-in

file system. This type of detection is efficient.

●

Global detection: The system detects the entire HDD through Window. This type of

detection takes time and might affect the HDD that is recording.

Step 3 Select the HDD that you want to detect

Step 4 Click

Start Check

The system starts detecting the HDD and displays the detection information.

When system is detecting HDD, click

Stop Check

to stop current detection. Click

Start

Check

to detect again.

5.12.6.2 Detection Report

After the detection operation, you can view the detection report.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

STORAGE

Disk Check

Check Report

User's Manual

304

Figure 5-213 Check report

Step 2 Click to view detection results and S.M.A.R.T report.

Figure 5-214 Results

User's Manual

305

Figure 5-215 S.M.A.R.T

5.12.6.3 Disk Health Monitoring

Monitor health status of disks, and repair if any exceptions are found so as to avoid data loss.

Select

Main Menu

STORAGE

Disk Check

Health Monitoring

Click to show disk details interface. Then select

Check Type

, set time period, and then click

. The system shows the details of disk monitoring status.

Figure 5-216 Disk details

User's Manual

306

5.12.7 Record Estimate

Record estimate function can calculate how long you can record video according to the HDD

capacity, and calculate the required HDD capacity according to the record period.

Step 1

Select Main Menu

STORAGE

Rec Estimate

Figure 5-217 Record estimation

Step 2 Click .

You can configure the

Resolution

Frame Rate

Bit Rate

and

Record Time

for the selected

channel.

Figure 5-218 Modify channel settings

Step 3 Click

Apply

User's Manual

307

Then the system will calculate the time period that can be used for storage according to

the channels settings and HDD capacity.

Click

Copy to

to copy the settings to other channels.

5.12.7.1 Calculating Recording Time

Procedure

Step 1 On the

Rec Estimate

interface, click the

By Space

tab.

Figure 5-219 By space

Step 2 Click

Select

Step 3 Select the checkbox of the HDD that you want to calculate.

Figure 5-220 Recording time

5.12.7.2 Calculating HDD Capacity for Storage

Step 1 On the

Rec Estimate

interface, click the

By Time

tab.

Figure 5-221 By time

Step 2 In the

Time

box, enter the time period that you want to record.

In the

Total Space

box, the required HDD capacity is displayed.

5.12.8 FTP

You can store and view the recorded videos and snapshots on the FTP server.

User's Manual

308

Prerequisites

Purchase or download a FTP (File Transfer Protocol) server and install it on your PC.

For the created FTP user, you need to set the write permission; otherwise the upload of recorded

videos and snapshots will be failed.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

STORAGE

FTP

Figure 5-222 FTP

Step 2 Configure the parameters.

Table 5-67 FTP parameters

Parameter Description

Enable Enable the FTP upload function.

FTP type

Select FTP type.

●

FTP: Plaintext transmission.

●

SFTP: Encrypted transmission (recommended).

Server Address IP address of FTP server.

User's Manual

309

Parameter Description

Port

Enter the port of the FTP server.

●

FTP: The default is 21.

●

SFTP: The default is 22.

Username

Enter the username and password to log in to the FTP server.

If you enable the anonymity function, you can log in anonymously without

entering the username and password.

Password

Anonymous

Storage Path

Create folder on FTP server.

●

If you do not enter the name of remote directory, the system

automatically creates the folders according to the IP and time.

●

If you enter the name of remote directory, the system creates the

folder with the entered name under the FTP root directory first, and

then automatically creates the folders according to the IP and time.

File Size

Enter the length of the uploaded recorded video.

●

If the entered length is less than the recorded video length, only a

section of the recorded video can be uploaded.

●

If the entered length is more than the recorded video length, the

whole recorded video can be uploaded.

●

If the entered length is 0, the whole recorded video will be uploaded.

Picture Upload

Interval

●

If this interval is longer than snapshot interval, the system takes the

recent snapshot to upload. For example, the interval is 5 seconds, and

snapshot interval is 2 seconds per snapshot, the system uploads the

recent snapshot every 5 seconds.

●

If this interval is shorter than snapshot interval, the system uploads the

snapshot per the snapshot interval. For example, the interval is 5

seconds, and snapshot interval is 10 seconds per snapshot, the system

uploads the snapshot every 10 seconds.

●

To configure the snapshot interval, go to

Main Menu

CAMERA

Encode

Snapshot

Channel Select the channel that you want to apply the FTP settings.

Day

Select the week day and set the time period that you want to upload the

recorded files. You can set two periods for each week day.

Period 1, Period 2

Record type

Select the record type (Alarm, Intel, MD, and General) that you want to

upload. The selected record type will be uploaded during the configured

time period.

Step 3 Click

Test

to validate the FTP connection.

If FTP connection failed, check the network and FTP settings.

Step 4 Click

Apply

5.12.9 iSCSI

Internet Small Computer Systems Interface (iSCSI) is a transport layer protocol that works on top of

the Transport Control Protocol (TCP), and enables block-level SCSI data transport between the iSCSI

User's Manual

310

initiator and the storage target over TCP/IP networks. After the network disk is mapped to the NVR

device through iSCSI, the data can be stored on the network disk.

This function is available on select models.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

STORAGE

iSCSI

Figure 5-223 iSCSI

Step 2 Set parameters.

Table 5-68 iSCSI parameters

Parameter Description

Server Address Enter the server address of iSCSI server.

Port Enter the port of iSCSI server, and the default value is 3260.

Storage Path

Click

Storage Path

to select a remote storage path.

Each path represents an iSCSI shared disk and these paths are generated

when created on the server

Username,

Password

Enter the username and password of iSCSI server.

If anonymous login is supported by iSCSI server, you can enable

Anonymous

to log in as an anonymous user.

Step 3 Click

Apply

User's Manual

311

5.13 Account

You can manage users, user group and ONVIF user, and set admin security questions.

5.13.1 Group

The accounts of the Device adopt two-level management mode: user and user group. Every user

must belong to a group, and one user only belongs to one group.

The

admin

and

user

group are two default user groups that cannot be deleted. You can add more

groups and define corresponding permissions.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

ACCOUNT

Group

Figure 5-224 Group

Step 2 Click

Add

Step 3 Enter group name and then enter some remarks if necessary.

User's Manual

312

Figure 5-225 Add group

Step 4 Select the checkboxes to select permissions.

Step 5 Click

Click to modify the corresponding group information, click to delete the group.

5.13.2 User

5.13.2.1 Adding User

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

ACCOUNT

User

User's Manual

313

Figure 5-226 User

Step 2 Click

Add

Figure 5-227 Add user

Step 3 Configure the parameters.

Table 5-69 Parameters of adding user

Parameter Description

Username

Enter a username and password for the account.

Password

Confirm Password Enter the password again to confirm it.

User's Manual

314

Parameter Description

Remarks

Optional.

Enter a description of the account.

User MAC Enter user MAC address

Group

Select a group for the account.

The user rights must be within the group permissions.

Period

Click

Setting

to define a period during which the new account can log in

to the Device. The new account cannot access the device during other

periods.

Permission

Select the checkboxes to grant permissions to the user.

To manage the user account easily, when defining the user account

permission, do not give the authority to the common user account

higher that the advanced user account.

Step 4 Click

Click to modify the corresponding user information, click to delete the user.

5.13.2.2 Changing Password

We recommend you change the password regularly to enhance device security.

Users with account permissions can change the password of other users.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

ACCOUNT

User

Step 2 Click of the corresponding user.

User's Manual

315

Figure 5-228 Change password

Step 3 Click to enable the

Modify Password

function.

Step 4 Enter old password and then enter new password twice.

●

The password must consist of 8–32 non-blank characters and contain at least two types

of the following characters: uppercase, lowercase, numbers, and special characters

(excluding ' " ; : &).

●

For your device security, create a strong password.

●

Check the box to enable Unlock Pattern function, click .

Step 5 Click to enable

Unlock Pattern

and then click to draw the pattern.

Step 6 Click

5.13.3 Resetting Password

You can reset the password when you forget the password.

5.13.3.1 Enabling Password Reset

Enable the password reset function and configure the linked email address and security questions

that are used to reset the password.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

ACCOUNT

Password Reset

Step 2 Click to enable the password reset function.

This function is enabled by default.

Step 3 Enter an email address to receive the security code used to reset the password.

Step 4 Configure security questions and answers.

Step 5 (Optional) Follow the on-screen instructions to bind the Device to DMSS app.

User's Manual

316

Figure 5-229 Bind device

Step 6 Click

5.13.3.2 Resetting Password on Local Interface

Procedure

Step 1 Right-click the live page and then select any item on the shortcut menu.

●

If you have configured unlock pattern, the unlock pattern login window is displayed.

Click

Forgot Pattern

to switch to password login.

●

If you did not configure unlock pattern, the password login window is displayed.

User's Manual

317

Figure 5-230 Pattern login

User's Manual

318

Figure 5-231 Password login

Step 2 Click .

●

If you have set the linked email address, the system will notify you of data collection

required for resetting password. Click

●

If you did not set the linked email address, the system prompts you to enter an email

address. Enter the email address and then click

. Then the system will notify you of

data collection required for resetting password.

Figure 5-232 Notification on data colleciton

Step 3 Read the prompt and then click

Step 4 Click

After clicking

, the system will collect your information for password reset, purpose

and the information includes but not limited to email address, MAC address, and device

serial number. Read the prompt carefully before clicking

Step 5 Reset the password.

User's Manual

319

●

Email.

Select

as the reset mode, and then follow the on-screen instructions to get the

security code in your linked email address. After that, enter the security code in the

Security Code

box.

Figure 5-233 Reset mode (email)

●

App.

Select

QR Code for Binding Device

as the reset mode, and then follow the on-screen

instructions to get the security code on the DMSS app. After that, enter the security

code in the

Security Code

box.

Figure 5-234 Reset mode (app)

●

Security question

Select

Security Question

as reset mode and then answer the security questions.

If you did not configure the security questions in advance ,

Security Question

is not

available on the

Reset Mode

list.

Step 6 Click

User's Manual

320

Step 7 Enter the new password and then enter the password again to confirm it.

Figure 5-235 Enter new password

Step 8 Click

The password is reset.

Step 9 (Optional) When the system prompts whether to synchronize the password with the

remote devices accessed through the private protocol, click

to synchronize the

password.

5.13.4 ONVIF User

To connect the camera from the third party to the NVR via the ONVIF protocol, you need to use a

verified ONVIF account.

The default ONVIF user is

admin

. It is created after you initialize the NVR and cannot be deleted.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

ACCOUNT

ONVIF User

User's Manual

321

Figure 5-236 ONVIF user

Step 2 Click

Add

Figure 5-237 Add ONVIF user

Step 3 Configure username, password and user group.

Step 4 Click

Click to modify the corresponding user information, click to delete current user.

User's Manual

322

5.14 Security

5.14.1 Security Status

Security scanning helps get a whole picture of device security status. You can scan user, service and

security module status for detailed information on the security status of the device.

Detecting User and Service

Green icon represents a healthy status of the scanned item, and orange icon represents a risky

status.

●

warn risk. You can click

Details

to see the detailed risk description.

●

User Status: When one of device users or ONVIF users uses weak password, the icon will be in

orange to warn risk. You can click

Details

to optimize or ignore the risk warning.

Figure 5-238 Security status

User's Manual

323

Figure 5-239 Details (1)

●

Configuration Security: When there’s a risk in the device configuration, the icon will be in orange

to warn risk. You can click

Details

to see the detailed risk description.

Figure 5-240 Details (2)

Scanning Security Modules

This area shows the running status of security modules. For details about the security modules, point

to the icon to see the on-screen instructions.

Re-scanning Security Status

You can click

Rescan

to scan security status.

5.14.2 System Service

You can set NVR basic information such as basic services, 802.1x and HTTPS.

5.14.2.1 Basic Services

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

SECURITY

System Service

Basic Services

User's Manual

324

Figure 5-241 Basic services

Step 2 Enable the system services.

There might be safety risk when

Mobile Push Notifications

CGI

ONVIF

SSH

and

NTP

Server

is enabled. Disable these functions when they are not needed.

Table 5-70 Basic service parameters

Parameter Description

Mobile Push Notifications

After enabling this function, the alarm triggered by the NVR can be

pushed to a mobile phone. This function is enabled by default.

CGI

If this function is enabled, the remote devices can be added through

the CGI protocol. This function is enabled by default.

ONVIF

If this function is enabled, the remote devices can be added through

the ONVIF protocol. This function is enabled by default.

NTP Server

After enabling this function, a NTP server can be used for time

synchronization. This function is enabled by default.

SSH

After enabling this function, you can use SSH service. This function is

disabled by default.

Enable Device Discovery

After enabling this function, the NVR can be found by other devices

through searching.

User's Manual

325

Parameter Description

Private Protocol

Authentication Mode

●

Security Mode (Recommended): Uses Digest access

authentication when connecting to NVR.

●

Compatible Mode: Select this mode when the client does not

support Digest access authentication.

LLDP

Enable the LLDP service.

The Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) allows two different

devices to collect hardware and protocol information about

neighboring devices, which is useful in troubleshooting the

network.

Step 3 Click

Apply

5.14.2.2 802.1x

The Device needs to pass 802.1x certification to enter the LAN.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

SECURITY

System Service

802.1x

Figure 5-242 802.1x

Step 2 Select the Ethernet card you want to certify.

Step 3 Select

Enable

and configure parameters.

User's Manual

326

Table 5-71 802.1x parameters

Parameter Description

Authentication

●

PEAP: protected EAP protocol.

●

TLS: Transport Layer Security. Provide privacy and data integrity

between two communications application programs.

CA Certificate

Enable it and click

Browse

to import CA certificate from flash drive. For

details about importing and creating a certificate, see "5.14.4 CA

Certificate".

Username The username shall be authorized at server.

Password Password of the corresponding username.

Step 4 Click

Apply

5.14.2.3 HTTPS

We recommend you enable HTTPS function to enhance system security.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

SECURITY

System Service

HTTPS

Figure 5-243 HTTPS

Step 2 Enable HTTPS function.

Step 3 (Optional) Enable

Compatible with TLSv1.1 and earlier versions

to allow protocol

compatibility.

Step 4 Click

Certificate Management

to create or import a HTTPS certificate from USB drive. For

details about importing or creating a CA certificate, see "5.14.4 CA Certificate".

Step 5 Select a HTTPS certificate.

Step 6 Click

Apply

5.14.3 Attack Defense

5.14.3.1 Firewall

You can configure the hosts that are allowed or prohibited to access the Device.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

SECURITY

Attack Defense

Firewall

User's Manual

327

Figure 5-244 Firewall

Step 2 Click to enable the firewall.

Step 3 Select a firewall mode.

●

Allow List

: The hosts on the allowlist can access the Device.

●

Block List

: The hosts on the blocklist are prohibited to access the Device.

Step 4 Click

Add

and then select a type for the allowlist or blocklist.

You can allow or prohibit hosts through a specific IP address, a network segment, or a MAC

address.

●

IP address.

Enter the IP address, start port and end port, and then click

●

IP segment.

Enter the start address and end address, starting port and ending port, and then click

●

MAC address.

Enter the MAC address, and then click

Step 5 Click

Apply

5.14.3.2 Account Lockout

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

SECURITY

Attack Defense

Account Lockout

User's Manual

328

Figure 5-245 Account lockout

Step 2 Set parameters.

Table 5-72 Account lockout parameters

Parameter Description

Attempt(s)

Set the maximum number of allowable wrong password entries. The

account will be locked after your entries exceed the maximum number.

Lock Time Set how long the account is locked for.

Step 3 Click

Apply

5.14.3.3 Anti-DoS Attack

You can enable

SYN Flood Attack Defense

and

ICMP Flood Attack Defense

to defend the Device

against Dos attack.

Figure 5-246 Anti-Dos Attack

5.14.3.4 Sync Time-Allowlist

You can configure which hosts are allowed to synchronize time with the Device.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

SECURITY

Attack Defense

Sync Time-Allowlist

User's Manual

329

Figure 5-247 Sync Time-Allowlist

Step 2 Click to enable the function.

Step 3 Click

Add

to add trusted hosts for time synchronization.

●

If you set

Type

IP Address

, enter the IP address, and then click

●

If you set

Type

IP Segment

, enter the start address and end address, and then click

Step 4 Click

Apply

5.14.4 CA Certificate

5.14.4.1 Device Certificate

Create Certificate

1. Select

Main Menu

SECURITY

CA Certificate

Device Certificate

User's Manual

330

Figure 5-248 Device certificate

2. Click

Create Certificate

Figure 5-249 Create certificate

3. Configure the parameters.

4. Click

Create

CA Application and Import

Click

CA Application and Import

and then follow the on-screen instructions to finish CA application

User's Manual

331

and import.

Figure 5-250 CA application and import

Import Third-Party Certificate

1. Click

Import Third-Party Certificate

2. Configure the parameters.

Table 5-73 Parameters for importing third-party certificate

Parameter Description

Path

Click

Browse

to find the third-party certificate path on the USB drive.

Private Key

Click

Browse

to find the third-party certificate private key on the USB

drive.

Private Key Password Input the private key password.

3. Click

Create

5.14.4.2 Trusted CA Certificate

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

SECURITY

CA Certificate

Trusted CA Certificate

Step 2 Click

Install Trusted Certificate

User's Manual

332

Figure 5-251 Create certificate

Step 3 Click

Browse

to select the certificate that you want to install.

Step 4 Click

Import

5.14.5 Audio/Video Encryption

The Device supports audio and video encryption during data transmission.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

SECURITY

AUDIO/VIDEO ENCRYPTION

Audio/Video

Transmission

User's Manual

333

Figure 5-252 Audio and video transmission

Step 2 Configure parameters.

Table 5-74 Audio and video transmission parameters

Area Parameter Description

Private

Protocol

Enable

Enables stream frame encryption by using private protocol.

There might be safety risk if this service is disabled.

Encryption

Type

Use the default setting.

Update Period

of Secret Key

Secret key update period.

Value range: 0–720 hours. 0 means never update the secret

key.

Default value: 12.

RTSP over

TLS

Enable

Enables RTSP stream encryption by using TLS.

There might be safety risk if this service is disabled.

Select a device

certificate

Select a device certificate for RTSP over TLS.

Certificate

Management

For details about certificate management, see "5.14.4.1 Device

Certificate".

Step 3 Click

Apply

5.14.6 Security Warning

5.14.6.1 Security Exception

The Device gives warnings to the user when a security exception occurs.

User's Manual

334

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

SECURITY

Security Warning

Security Exception

Figure 5-253 Security exception

Step 2 Click to enable the function.

Click to view the list of security exception events.

Step 3 Configure alarm linkage actions. For details, see Table 5-43.

Step 4 Click

Apply

5.14.6.2 Illegal Login

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

SECURITY

Security Warning

Illegal Login

User's Manual

335

Figure 5-254 Illegal login

Step 2 Click to enable the function.

Step 3 Configure alarm linkage actions. For details, see Table 5-43.

Step 4 Click

Apply

5.15 System

5.15.1 General

You can set NVR basic information such as system date and holiday.

5.15.1.1 General

You can set device basic information such as device name, and serial number.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

SYSTEM

General

Basic

User's Manual

336

Figure 5-255 Basic settings

Step 2 Set parameters.

Table 5-75 Basic parameters

Parameter Description

Device Name Enter the Device name.

Device No. Enter a number for the Device.

Language Select a language for the Device system.

Video Standard Select

PAL

NTSC

as needed.

Sync Remote Device

Enable this function; the NVR can synchronize information with the

remote device such as Language, video standard and time zone.

Instant Playback

In the

Instant Play

box, enter the time length for playing back the

recorded video. The value ranges from 5 to 60.

On the live view control bar, click the instant playback button to play

back the recorded video within the configured time.

Logout Time

Enter the standby time for the Device. The Device automatically logs

out when it is not working in the configured period. You need to login

the Device again.

The value ranges from 0 to 60. 0 indicates there is not standby time for

the Device.

Click

Monitor Channel(s) when logout

. You can select the channels

that you want to continue monitoring when you logged out.

CAM Time Sync Syncs the Device time with IP camera.

Interval Enter the interval for time sync.

Logout Time

You can set auto logout interval once login user remains inactive for a

specified time. Value ranges from 0 to 60 minutes.

Navigation Bar

Enable the navigation bar. When you click on the live view screen, the

navigation bar is displayed.

User's Manual

337

Parameter Description

Mouse Sensitivity

Adjust the speed of double-click by moving the slider.

The bigger the value is, the faster the speed is.

Step 3 Click

Apply

button to save settings.

5.15.1.2 Date and Time

You can set device time. You can enable NTP (Network Time Protocol) function so that the device

can sync time with the NTP server.

You can also configure date and time settings by selecting

Main Menu

SYSTEM

General

Date&Time

Step 1 Click

Date&Time

tab.

Figure 5-256 Date and time

Step 2 Configure the settings for date and time parameters.

Table 5-76 Data and time parameters

Parameter Description

System Time

In the

System Time

box, enter time for the system.

Click the time zone list, you can select a time zone for the system,

and the time in adjust automatically.

Do not change the system time randomly; otherwise the recorded

video cannot be searched. It is recommended to avoid the

recording period or stop recording first before you change the

system time.

Time Zone

In the

Time Zone

list, select a time zone for the system.

User's Manual

338

Parameter Description

Date Format

In the

Date Format

list, select a date format for the system.

Date Separator In the

Date Separator

list, select a separator style for the date.

Time Format

In the

Time Format

list, select

12-HOUR

24-HOUR

for the time

display style.

DST

Enable the Daylight Saving Time function. Click

Week

Date

Start Time

Configure the start time and end time for the DST.

End Time

NTP

Enable the NTP function to sync the Device time with the NTP

server.

If NTP is enabled, device time will be automatically synchronized

with server.

Server Address

In the

Server Address

box, enter the IP address or domain name of

the corresponding NTP server.

Click

Manual Update

, the Device starts syncing with the server

immediately.

Port

The system supports TCP protocol only and the default setting is

123.

Interval

In the

Interval

box, enter the amount of time that you want the

Device to sync time with the NTP server. The value ranges from 0 to

65535.

Step 3 Click

to save settings.

5.15.1.3 Holiday

Here you can add, edit, and delete holiday. After you successfully set holiday information, you can

view holiday item on the record and snapshot period.

You can also configure holiday settings by selecting

Main Menu

SYSTEM

General

Holiday

Step 1 Click

User's Manual

339

Figure 5-257 Holiday

Step 2 Click

Add Holidays

Figure 5-258 Add holidays

Step 3 Set holiday name, repeat mode and holiday mode.

Click

Add more

to add new holiday information.

Step 4 Click

Add

, you can add current holiday to the list.

●

Click the drop-down list of the state; you can enable/disable holiday date.

●

Click to change the holiday information. Click to delete current date.

Step 5 Click

to save settings.

User's Manual

340

5.15.2 Serial Port

After setting RS-232 parameters, the NVR can use the COM port to connect to other device to debug

and operate.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

MAIN MENU

SYSTEM

Serial Port

Figure 5-259 Serial port

Step 2 Configure parameters.

Table 5-77 Serial port parameters

Parameter Description

Function

Select serial port control protocol.

●

Console: Upgrade the program and debug with the console and

mini terminal software.

●

Keyboard: Control this Device with special keyboard.

●

Adapter: Connect with PC directly for transparent transmission of

data.

●

Protocol COM: Configure the function to protocol COM, in order to

overlay card number.

●

PTZ Matrix: Connect matrix control

Different series products support different RS-232 functions.

Baud Rate Select baud rate, which is 115200 by default.

Data Bits It ranges from 5 to 8, which is 8 by default.

Stop Bits It includes 1 and 2.

Parity It includes none, odd, even, mark and null.

Step 3 Click

Apply

User's Manual

341

5.16 Output and Display

5.16.1 Display

You can configure the display effect such as displaying time title and channel title, adjusting image

transparency, and selecting the resolution.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

DISPLAY

Display

Figure 5-260 Display

Step 2 Configure the parameters.

Table 5-78 Display parameters

Parameter Description

Main Screen/Sub

Screen

Configure the output port format of both screens.

●

When sub screen is disabled, the format of main screen is HDMI/VGA

simultaneous output.

●

When sub screen is enabled, the format of main screen and sub

screen are non-simultaneous outputs.

◇

When output port of sub screen is set to

HDMI

, the output port of

main screen is set to

VGA

by the device.

◇

When output port of sub screen is set to

VGA

, the output port of

main screen is set to

HDMI

by the device.

Enable Decoding After it is enabled, the device can normally decode.

Time Title/Channel

Title

Select the checkbox and the date and time of the system will be displayed

in the preview screen.

Transparency

Set the transparency of the local menu of the NVR device. The higher the

transparency, the more transparent the local menu.

User's Manual

342

Parameter Description

Time Title/Channel

Title

Select the checkbox and the date and time of the system will be displayed

in the preview screen.

Image

Enhancement

Select the checkbox to optimize the preview image edges.

SMD Preview

Select the checkbox to display the SMD previews in the live view

interface.

AI Rule

Select the checkbox to display the AI rules in the live view interface.

This function is for some series products only.

Original Ratio

Click

Setting

and select the channel to restore the corresponding channel

image to the original scale.

Live Audio

Configure audio input on live view. You can select

Audio 1

Audio 2

, and

Mixing

. For example, if you select

Audio 1

for

channel, the sound of

audio input port 1 of camera is playing. If you select

Mixing

, the sound of

all audio input ports are playing.

Resolution Support 1920×1080, 1280×1024(default), 1280×720.

Step 3 Click

Apply

5.16.2 Tour

You can configure a tour of selected channels to repeat playing videos. The videos display in turn

according to the channel group configured in tour settings. The system displays one channel group

for a certain period and then automatically changes to the next channel group.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

DISPLAY

Tour Setting

Main Screen

User's Manual

343

Figure 5-261 Tour

●

On the top right of the live view screen, use the left mouse button or press Shift to

switch between (image switching is allowed) and (image switching is not

allowed) to turn on/off the tour function.

●

On the navigation bar, click to enable the tour and click to disable it.

Step 2 Configure the tour setting parameters.

Table 5-79 Tour parameters

Parameter Description

Enable Tour Enable tour function.

Interval

Enter the amount of time that you want each channel group displays on

the screen. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 120 seconds, and the

default value is 5 seconds.

Motion Tour, Alarm

Tour

Select the View 1 or View 8 for

Motion Tour

and

Alarm Tour

(system

alarm events).

Live Layout

In the

Live Layout

list, select

, or other modes

that are supported by the Device.

User's Manual

344

Parameter Description

Channel Group

Display all channel groups under the current Window Split setting.

●

Add a channel group: Click

Add

, in the pop-up

Add Group

channel,

select the channels to form a group, and then click

Save

●

Delete a channel group: Select the checkbox of any channel group,

and then click

Delete

●

Edit a channel group: Select the checkbox of any channel group and

then click

Modify

, or double-click on the group. The

Modify

Channel Group

dialog box is displayed. You can regroup the

channels.

●

Click

Move up

Move down

to adjust the position of channel

group.

Step 3 Click

Apply

to save the settings.

5.16.3 Custom Layout

You can set customized video split mode.

●

This function is for some series products. See the actual product for detailed information.

●

Device max. supports 5 customized videos.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

DISPLAY

Custom Split

User's Manual

345

Figure 5-262 Custom split

Step 2 Click and then click to select basic mode.

System adopts the basic window mode as the new window name. For example, if you

select the 8 display mode, the default name is Split8.In regular mode, drag the mouse in

the preview frame; you can merge several small windows to one window so that you can

get you desired split mode.

●

After merge the window, system adopts the remaining window amount as the new

name such as Split6.

●

Select the window you want to merge (red highlighted), click to cancel the merge

to restore the basic mode.

●

Click to delete the customized window mode.

User's Manual

346

Figure 5-263 Merged window

Step 3 Click

Apply

to exit.

After the setup, you can go to the preview window, right-click and then select

Live Layout

to select the custom split layout.

5.17 POS

You can connect the Device to the POS (Point of Sale) machine and receive the information from it.

This function applies to the scenarios such as supermarket POS machine. After connection is

established, the Device can access the POS information and display the overlaid text in the channel

window.

5.17.1 Settings

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

POS

POS Setting

User's Manual

347

Figure 5-264 POS setting

Step 2 Configure the POS parameters.

Table 5-80 POS parameters

Parameter Description

POS Name

In the POS Name list, select the POS machine that you want to configures

settings for. Click to modify the POS name.

●

The POS name must be unique.

●

You can enter up to 21 Chinese characters or 63 English characters.

Enable Enable the POS function.

Record Channel Click to select a channel to record.

Privacy Enter the privacy contents.

Protocol Select a protocol. Different machines correspond to different protocols.

Connection Mode

Select the connection protocol type. Click , the

IP Address

window is

displayed.

In the

Source IP

box, enter the IP address (the machine that is connected to

the Device) that sends messages.

Character Encode Select a character encoding mode.

User's Manual

348

Parameter Description

Overlay Mode

In the

Overlay Mode

list, Select

Turn

ROLL

●

Turn: Once the information is at 16 lines, system displays the next page.

●

ROLL: Once the information is at 16 lines, system rolls one line after

another to delete the first line.

When the local preview mode is in 4-split, the turn/ROLL function is based

on 8 lines.

Network time out

When the network is not working correctly and cannot be recovered after

the entered timeout limit, the POS information will not display normally.

After the network is recovered, the latest POS information will be displayed.

Time Display

Enter the time that how long you want to keep the POS information

displaying. For example, enter 5, the POS information disappear from the

screen after 5 seconds.

Font Size Select

Small

Medium

, or

Big

as the text size of POS information

Font Color In the color bar, click to select the color for the text size of POS information.

POS Info

Enable the POS Info function, the POS information displays in the live

view/WEB.

Line Break

There is no line delimiter by default.

After you set the line delimiter (HEX), the overlay information after the

delimiter is displayed in the new line. For example, the line delimiter is F

and the overlay information is 123F6789, NVR displays overlay information

on the local preview interface and Web as:

123

6789

Step 3 Click

Apply

5.17.1.1 Privacy Setup

Procedure

Step 1 Click next to

Privacy

Figure 5-265 Privacy

User's Manual

349

Step 2 Set privacy information.

Step 3 Click

5.17.1.2 Connection Mode

Connection type is UDP or TCP.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Connection Mode

UDP

TCP_CLINET

TCP

Step 2 Click .

Figure 5-266 IP address

Step 3 For

Source IP

and

Port

, enter the POS IP address and port.

Step 4 Click

5.17.2 Search

The system supports fuzzy search.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

POS

POS Search

User's Manual

350

Figure 5-267 POS search

Step 2 In the

POS Search

box, enter the information such as transaction number on your receipt,

amount, or product name.

Step 3 In the

Start Time

box and

End Time

box, enter the time period that you want to search

the POS transaction information.

Step 4 Click

The searched transaction results display in the table.

5.18 Audio

The audio function is to manage audio files and set schedule play function. It is to realize audio

broadcast activation function.

This function is available on select models.

5.18.1 File Management

You can add audio files, listen to audio files, rename and delete audio files, and configure the audio

volume.

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

AUDIO

File Management

User's Manual

351

Figure 5-268 File management

Step 2 Click

Add

Figure 5-269 Add file

Step 3 Select the audio file and then click

Import

System supports MP3 and PCM audio format.

Step 4 Click

to start importing audio files from the USB storage device.

User's Manual

352

If the importing is successful, the audio files will display in the

File Management

page.

5.18.2 Audio Play

You can configure the settings to play the audio files during the defined time period.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

AUDIO

Schedule

Figure 5-270 Schedule

Step 2 Configure the parameters.

Table 5-81 Schedule parameters

Parameter Description

Period

In the

Period

box, enter the time. Select the checkbox to enable the

settings. You can configure up to six periods.

File Name

In the

File Name

list, select the audio file that you want to play for this

configured period.

Interval

In the

Interval

box, enter the time in minutes for how often you want to

repeat the playing.

Loop

Configure how many times you want to repeat the playing in the

defined period.

Output

Includes two options: MIC and Audio. It is MIC by default. The MIC

function shares the same port with talkback function and the latter has

the priority.

Some series products do not have audio port.

●

The finish time for audio playing depends on audio file size and the configured interval.

●

Playing priority: Alarm event > Audio talk > Trial listening > Schedule audio file.

Step 3 Click

Apply

User's Manual

353

5.18.3 Broadcast

System can broadcast to the camera, or broadcast to a channel group.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Mani Menu

AUDIO

Broadcast

Figure 5-271 Broadcast

Step 2 Click

Add Group

Figure 5-272 Add group (1)

Step 3 Input group name and select one or more channels.

Step 4 Click

Save

to complete broadcast group setup.

User's Manual

354

●

On the broadcast interface, click to change group setup, click to delete

group.

●

After complete broadcast setup, on the preview interface and then click on the

navigation bar, device pops up broadcast dialogue box. Select a group name and then

click to begin broadcast.

Figure 5-273 Add group (2)

5.19 Operation and Maintenance

5.19.1 Log

You can view and search for the log information, or back up log to the USB device.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

MAINTAIN

Log

User's Manual

355

Figure 5-274 Log

Step 2 In the

Type

list, select the log type that you want to view (

System

Config

Storage

Record

Account

Clear Log

Playback

, and

Connection

) or select

All

to view all logs.

Step 3 Enter the time period to search, and then click

The search results are displayed.

Related Operations

●

Click

Details

or double-click the log to view details. Click

to view more log

information.

●

Click

Backup

to back up the logs to the USB storage device.

●

Click

Clear

to remove all logs.

5.19.2 System

5.19.2.1 System Version

Select

Main Menu

MAINTAIN

System Info

Version

You can view NVR version information.

5.19.2.2 AI Algorithm Version

Select

Main Menu

MAINTAIN

System Info

Intelligent Algorithm

You can view version information for AI functions such as face detection, face recognition, IVS, and

User's Manual

356

video metadata.

5.19.2.3 HDD Info

You can view the HDD quantity, HDD type, total space, free space, status, and S.M.A.R.T information.

Select

Main Menu

MAINTAIN

System Info

Disk

Figure 5-275 Disk information

Table 5-82 Disk information

Parameter Description

No.

Indicates the number of the currently connected HDD. The asterisk (*)

means the current working HDD.

Device Name Indicates name of HDD.

Physical Position Indicates installation position of HDD.

Properties Indicates HDD type.

Total Space Indicates the total capacity of HDD.

Free Space Indicates the usable capacity of HDD.

Health Status Indicates the health status of the HDD.

S.M.A.R.T View the S.M.A.R.T reports from HDD detecting.

Status Indicates the status of the HDD to show if it is working normally.

5.19.2.4 BPS

You can view current video bit rate (kb/s) and resolution.

Select

Main Menu

MAINTAIN

System Info

BPS

User's Manual

357

Figure 5-276 BPS

5.19.2.5 Device Status

You can view fan running status such as speed, CPU temperature, and memory.

Select

Main Menu

MAINTAIN

System Info

Device Status

Figure 5-277 Device status

User's Manual

358

5.19.3 Network

5.19.3.1 Online User

You can view the online user information or block any user for a period of time. To block an online

user, click and then enter the time that you want to block this user. The maximum value you can

set is 65535.

The system detects every 5 seconds to check whether there is any user added or deleted, and update

the user list timely.

Select

Main Menu

MAINTAIN

Network

Online User

Figure 5-278 Online user

5.19.3.2 Network Load

Network load means the data flow which measures the transmission capability. You can view the

information such as data receiving speed and sending speed.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

MAINTAIN

Network

Network Load

User's Manual

359

Figure 5-279 Network load

Step 2 Click the LAN name that you want to view, for example,

LAN1

The system displays the information of data sending speed and receiving speed.

●

System displays LAN1 load by default.

●

Only one LAN load can be displayed at one time.

5.19.3.3 Network Test

You can test the network connection status between the Device and other devices.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

MAINTAIN

Network

Test

User's Manual

360

Figure 5-280 Test

Step 2 In the

Destination IP

box, enter the IP address.

Step 3 Click

Test

After testing is completed, the test result is displayed. You can check the evaluation for

average delay, packet loss, and network status.

5.19.4 Maintenance and Management

5.19.4.1 Device Maintenance

When the Device has been running for a long time, you can enable the Device to restart

automatically at the idle time. You can also enable emergency maintenance.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

MAINTAIN

Manager

Maintenance

User's Manual

361

Figure 5-281 Maintenance

Step 2 Configure the parameters.

●

Auto Reboot

: Enable the Device to restart at the idle time.

●

Emergency Maintenance

: When the Device has an update power outage, running

error and other problems, and you cannot log in, then you can use the emergency

maintenance function to restart the Device, clear configuration, update the system, and

more.

Step 3 Click

Apply

5.19.4.2 Exporting System Settings

You can export or import the Device system settings if there are several Devices that require the

same setup.

●

The

Import/Export

interface cannot be opened if the backup operation is ongoing on the other

interfaces.

●

When you open the

Import/Export

interface, the system refreshes the devices and sets the

current directory as the first root directory.

●

Click

Format

to format the USB storage device.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

MAINTAIN

Manager

Import/Export

User's Manual

362

Figure 5-282 Import and export

Step 2 Insert a USB storage device into one of the USB ports on the Device.

Step 3 Click

Refresh

to refresh the interface.

The connected USB storage device is displayed.

User's Manual

363

Figure 5-283 Connected USB device

Step 4 Click

Export

There is a folder under the name style of "Config_[YYYYMMDDhhmmss]". Double-click this

folder to view the backup files.

5.19.4.3 Restoring Defaults

5.19.4.3.1 Restoring Defaults on the Local Interface

This function is for admin account only.

You can restore the Device to default settings on the local interface.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

MAINTAIN

Manager

Default

User's Manual

364

Figure 5-284 Default

Step 2 Restore the settings.

●

Default

: Restore all the configurations except network settings and user management

to the default..

●

Factory Default

: Restore all the configurations to the factory default settings.

5.19.4.3.2 Resetting Device through the Reset Button

You can use the reset button on the mainboard to reset the Device to the factory default settings.

The reset button is available on select models.

After resetting, all the configurations will be lost.

Procedure

Step 1 Disconnect the Device from power source, and then remove the cover panel. For details

about removing the cover panel, see "3.3 HDD Installation".

Step 2 Find the reset button on the mainboard, and then connect the Device to the power source

again.

Step 3 Press and hold the reset button for 5 seconds to 10 seconds.

User's Manual

365

Figure 5-285 Reset button

Step 4 Restart the Device.

After the Device restarts, the settings have been restored to the factory default.

5.19.4.4 System Update

5.19.4.4.1 Upgrading File

Procedure

Step 1 Insert a USB storage device containing the upgrade files into the USB port of the Device.

Step 2 Select

Main Menu

MAINTAIN

Manager

Update

Figure 5-286 Update

Step 3 Click

Update

User's Manual

366

Figure 5-287 Browse

Step 4 Click the file that you want to upgrade.

Step 5 The selected file is displayed in the

Update File

box.

Step 6 Click

Start

5.19.4.4.2 Online Upgrade

When the Device is connected to Internet, you can use online upgrade function to upgrade the

system.

Before using this function, you need to check whether there is any new version by auto check or

manual check.

●

Auto check: The Device checks if there is any new version available at intervals.

●

Manual check: Perform real-time check whether there is any new version available.

Ensure the correct power supply and network connection during upgrading; otherwise the

upgrading might be failed.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

Main Menu

MAINTAIN

Manager

Update

Step 2 Check whether there is any new version available.

●

Auto-check for updates: Enable Auto-check for updates.

●

Manual check: Click

Manual Check

The system starts checking the new versions. After checking is completed, the check result

is displayed.

●

If the "It is the latest version" text is displayed, you do not need to upgrade.

●

If the text indicating there is a new version, go to the step 3.

Step 3 Click

Update now

to update the system.

User's Manual

367

5.19.4.4.3 Uboot Upgrading

●

Under the root directory in the USB storage device, there must be "u-boot.bin.img" file and

"update.img" file saved, and the USB storage device must be in FAT32 format.

●

Make sure the USB storage device is inserted; otherwise the upgrading cannot be performed.

When starting the Device, the system automatically checkswhether there is a USB storage device

connected and any upgrade file, and if yes and the check result of the upgrade file is correct, the

system will upgrade automatically. The Uboot upgrade can avoid the situation that you have to

upgrade through +TFTP when the Device is halted.

5.19.4.5 Intelligent Diagnosis

When exception occurs, export data to check details.

Select

Maintain

Intelligent Diagnosis

Figure 5-288 Intelligent diagnosis

5.20 USB Device Auto Pop-up

After you inserted the USB device, system can auto detect it and pop up the following dialogue box.

It allows you to conveniently backup file, log, configuration or update system.

You can add a USB keyboard through USB port, and it can input characters limited to soft keyboard.

User's Manual

368

Figure 5-289 USB device prompt

5.21 Shutdown

●

When you see corresponding dialogue box "System is shutting down…" Do not click power on-

off button directly.

●

Do not unplug the power cable or click power on-off button to shutdown device directly when

device is running (especially when it is recording.)

●

Shut down the device and then unplug the power cable before you replace the HDD.

Procedure

●

From the main menu (Recommended)

1. Click at the upper-right corner.

User's Manual

369

Figure 5-290 Shutdown (1)

2. Select

Shutdown.

Draw the unlock pattern or input password first if you have no authority to shut down.

Figure 5-291 Shutdown (2)

User's Manual

370

Figure 5-292 Shutdown (3)

●

Remote Control

Press the power button on the remote for at least 3 seconds.

●

Press the power button at the rear panel of the device.

Auto Resume after Power Failure

The system can automatically backup video file and resume previous working status after power

failure.

User's Manual

371

6 Web Operation

●

The figures in the Manual are used for introducing the operations and only for reference. The

actual interface might be different dependent on the model you purchased.

●

The Manual is a general document for introducing the product, so there might be some functions

described for the Device in the Manual not apply to the model you purchased.

●

Besides Web, you can use our Smart PSS to login the device. For detailed information, see Smart

PSS user’s manual.

6.1 Network Connection

●

The factory default IP of the Device is 192.168.1.108.

●

The Device supports monitoring on different browsers such as Safari, Firefox, Google to perform

the functions such as multi-channel monitoring, PTZ control, and device parameters

configurations.

Procedure

Step 1 Check to make sure the Device has connected to the network.

Step 2 Configure the IP address, subnet mask and gateway for the PC and the Device. For details

about network configuration of the Device, see "5.19.3 Network".

Step 3 On your PC, check the network connection of the Device by using "ping ***.***.***.***".

Usually the return value of TTL is 255.

6.2 Web Login

Step 1 Open the browser, enter the IP address of the Device, and then press Enter.

User's Manual

372

Figure 6-1 Login

Step 2 Enter the username and password.

●

The default administrator account is

admin

. The password is the one that was

configured during initial settings. To ensure your account security, we recommend you

keep the password properly and change it regularly.

●

Click to display the password.

Step 3 Click

6.3 Web Main Menu

After you have logged in to the web, the main menu is displayed.

For detailed operations, see "5 Local Operations".

Figure 6-2 Main menu

User's Manual

373

Table 6-1 Main menu symbols

No. Icon Description

Includes configuration menu through which you can configure

camera settings, network settings, storage settings, system

settings, account settings, and view information.

2 None Displays system date and time.

When you point to , the current user account is displayed.

Click , select Logout, Reboot, or Shutdown according to your

actual situation.

Displays Cell Phone Client and Device SN QR Code.

●

Cell Phone Client: Use your mobile phone to scan the QR

code to add the device into the Cell Phone Client, and then

you can start accessing the Device from your cell phone.

●

Device SN: Obtain the Device SN by scanning the QR code. Go

to the P2P management platform and add the Device SN into

the platform. Then you can access and manage the device in

the WAN. For details, see the P2P operation manual. You can

also configure P2P function in the local configurations, see

"5.11.18 P2P".

Displays the web main menu.

7 None

Includes eight function tiles:

LIVE, PLAYBACK, AI, ALARM, POS,

OPERATION, BACKUP, DISPLAY, and AUDIO

. Click each tile to

open the configuration interface of the tile.

●

LIVE

: You can perform the operations such as viewing real-

time video, configuring channel layout, setting PTZ controls,

and using smart talk and instant record functions if needed.

●

PLAYBACK

: Search for and play back the recorded video

saved on the Device.

●

ALARM

: Search for alarm information and configure alarm

event actions.

●

: Configure and manage artificial intelligent events. It

includes smart search, parameters, and database.

●

POS

: View POS information and configure related settings.

●

OPERATION

: View system information, import/export system

configuration files, or update system.

●

BACKUP

: Search and back up the video files to the local PC or

external storage device such as USB storage device.

●

DISPLAY

: Configure the display effect such as displaying

content, image transparency, and resolution, and enable the

zero-channel function.

●

AUDIO

: Manage audio files and configure the playing

schedule. The audio file can be played in response to an

alarm event if the voice prompts function is enabled.

User's Manual

374

6.4 Cluster Service

The cluster function, also known as cluster redundancy, is a kind of deployment method that can

improve the reliability of the device. In the cluster system, there is a number of main devices and

another number of sub devices (the N+M mode), and they have a virtual IP address (the cluster IP).

When the main device fails, the corresponding sub device will take over the job automatically. When

the main device recovers, the sub device will transmit the configuration data, cluster IP address and

videos recorded during the failure to the main device which then takes over the job again.

In the N+M cluster system, there is a management server, the DCS (Dispatching Console) server,

which is responsible for timely and correct scheduling management of the main and sub devices.

When you create a cluster, the current device is used as the first sub device and the DCS server by

default.

This function is available on select models.

6.4.1 Configuring Cluster IP

When the main device malfunctions, the sub device can use the main device configuration and

virtual IP address to replace the work (monitor or record) accordingly. When you use the virtual IP to

access the device, you can still view the real-time video and there is no risk of record loss.

Step 1 Log in to the web as the admin user.

Step 2 Select

SETTING

Cluster Service

CLUSTER IP

Step 3 Select

Enable

Step 4 Configure

IP Address

Subnet Mask

and

Default Gateway

Step 5 Click

6.4.2 Main Device

You can add several main devices manually. After you enable the cluster function, you can vie IP

address, working status and connection log of the main device.

Step 1 Select

SETTING

Cluster Service

Main Device

Step 2 Click

Manual Add

User's Manual

375

Figure 6-3 Manual add

Step 3 Configure parameters.

Table 6-2 Parameters of adding main device

Parameter Description

Device Name Customize the device name.

IP Address Enter the IP address of the NVR.

Port

Set the TCP port number of the server. The default value is 37777.

You can view the current TCP port number in

SETTING

Network

Port

Username/Password Enter the username and password of the NVR.

Step 4 Click

Step 5 (Optional) Click to view event occurrence time, name, operation and reason.

6.4.3 Sub Device

When you add the first sub device, the default IP is the device IP address that logs in on the web.

From

SETTING

Cluster Service

Sub Device

, you can add sub devices. For details, see "6.4.2 Main

Device".

When adding the first sub device, you need not enter the IP address, because the first sub device is

the current device by default.

After you added main device and sub device, you need to enable cluster function. See "6.4.5

Configuring Cluster Control" for more information.

User's Manual

376

6.4.4 Transferring Videos

After the main device has recovered, the videos recorded on the sub device during the failure period

can be transferred to the main device.

Prerequisites

The main device works normally.

Procedure

Step 1 Select

SETTING

Cluster Service

Transfer Recorder

Step 2 Click

Add Task

Step 3 Configure parameters.

Step 4 Click

You can click to view details on the transferring task.

6.4.5 Configuring Cluster Control

6.4.5.1 Cluster Control

From

SETTING

Cluster Service

Cluster Control

, you can enable or disable cluster.

Figure 6-4 Start cluster

You can see the corresponding prompt if you successfully enabled cluster service.

6.4.5.2 Arbitrage IP

When there are only 2 devices in the cluster, a third-party device is required to determine whether

the main device is faulty, so arbitration IP must be set for the cluster to perform a normal

replacement operation. The arbitration IP can be the IP address of another device, computer or

gateway.

Step 1 Select

SETTING

Cluster Service

Arbitrage IP

User's Manual

377

Figure 6-5 Arbitrage IP

Step 2 Configure the preferred and alternate IP.

Step 3 Click

6.4.6 Cluster Log

You can search for and view cluster logs.

Step 1 Select

SETTING

Cluster Service

Cluster Log

Figure 6-6 Cluster log

Step 2 Enter the start time and end time.

Step 3 Click

User's Manual

378

7 Glossary

●

DHCP

: DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is one of the TCP/IP protocol cluster. It is

mainly used to assign temporary IP addresses to computers on a network.

●

DDNS

: DDNS (Dynamic Domain Name Server) is a service that maps Internet domain names to IP

addresses. This service is useful to anyone who wants to operate a server (web server, mail server,

ftp server and more.) connected to the internet with a dynamic IP or to someone who wants to

connect to an office computer or server from a remote location with software.

●

eSATA

: eSATA (External Serial AT) is an interface that provides fast data transfer for external

storage devices. It is the extension specifications of a SATA interface.

●

GPS

: GPS (Global Positioning System) is a satellite system, protected by the US, safely orbiting

thousands of kilometers above the earth.

●

PPPoE

: PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) is a specification for connecting multiple

computer users on an Ethernet local area network to a remote site. Now the popular mode is

ADSL and it adopts PPPoE protocol.

●

Wi-Fi

: Wi-Fi is the name of a popular wireless networking technology that uses radio waves to

provide wireless high-speed Internet and network connections. The standard is for wireless local

area networks (WLANs). It is like a common language that all the devices use to communicate to

each other. It is actually IEEE802.11, a family of standard The IEEE (Institute of Electrical and

Electronics Engineers Inc.)

●

: 3G is the wireless network standard. It is called 3G because it is the third generation of

cellular telecom standards. 3G is a faster network for phone and data transmission and speed Is

over several hundred kbps. Now there are four standards: CDMA2000, WCDMA, TD-SCDMA and

WiMAX.

●

Dual-stream

: The dual-stream technology adopts high-rate bit stream for local HD storage such

as QCIF/CIF/2CIF/DCIF/4CIF encode and one low-rate bit stream for network transmission such as

QCIF/CIF encode. It can balance the local storage and remote network transmission. The dual-

stream can meet the difference band width requirements of the local transmission and the

remote transmission. In this way, the local transmission using high-bit stream can achieve HD

storage and the network transmission adopting low bit stream suitable for the fluency

requirements of the 3G network such as WCDMA, EVDO, TD-SCDMA.

●

On-off value

: It is the non-consecutive signal sampling and output. It includes remote sampling

and remote output. It has two statuses: 1/0.

User's Manual

379

8 FAQ

Questions Reasons

The Device failed to start

properly.

●

Incorrect input power.

●

Incorrect connection of the power cord.

●

Damaged power switch.

●

Wrong program.

●

Damaged HDD.

●

Damaged mainboard.

The Device automatically shuts

down or stops running.

●

Unstable or insufficient input voltage.

●

Insufficient button power.

●

Improper operating environment.

●

Hardware error.

The Device cannot detect

HDD.

●

Damaged HDD or HDD ribbon.

●

Loose connection of HDD cable.

●

Damaged SATA port.

There is no video output in all

channels.

●

Program version is not correct.

●

Brightness is 0.

●

Hardware error.

I cannot find local records.

●

Damaged HDD or HDD ribbon.

●

Program version is not correct.

●

The recorded file has been overwritten.

●

The recording function has been disabled.

Distorted recorded videos.

●

Video quality setup is too low.

●

Program read error, bit data is too small. There is mosaic in

the full screen. Restart the NVR to solve this problem.

●

HDD data ribbon error.

●

HDD malfunction.

●

NVR hardware malfunctions.

Time display is not correct.

●

Setup is not correct.

●

Battery contact is not correct or voltage is too low.

●

Crystal is broken.

User's Manual

380

Questions Reasons

NVR cannot control PTZ.

●

Front panel PTZ error.

●

PTZ decoder setup, connection or installation is not

correct.

●

Cable connection is not correct.

●

PTZ setup is not correct.

●

PTZ decoder and NVR protocol is not compatible.

●

PTZ decoder and NVR address is not compatible.

●

When there are several decoders, add 120 Ohm between

the PTZ decoder A/B cables furthest end to delete the

reverberation or impedance matching. Otherwise the PTZ

control is not stable.

●

The distance is too far.

I cannot log in client-end or

web.

●

For Windows 98 or Windows ME user, update your system

to Windows 2000 sp4. Or you can install client-end

software of lower version. Please note right now, our NVR

is not compatible with Windows VISTA control.

●

ActiveX control has been disabled.

●

No dx8.1 or higher. Upgrade display card driver.

●

Network connection error.

●

Network setup error.

●

Password or username is invalid.

●

Client-end is not compatible with NVR program.

There is only mosaic no video

when preview or playback

video file remotely.

●

Network fluency is not good.

●

Client-end resources are limit.

●

Current user has no right to monitor.

Network connection is not

stable.

●

Network is not stable.

●

IP address conflict.

●

MAC address conflict.

●

PC or device network card is not good.

Burn error /USB back error.

●

Burner and NVR are in the same data cable.

●

System uses too much CPU resources. Stop record first and

then begin backup.

●

Data amount exceeds backup device capacity. It might

result in burner error.

●

Backup device is not compatible.

●

Backup device is damaged.

Keyboard cannot control NVR.

●

NVR serial port setup is not correct.

●

Address is not correct.

●

When there are several switchers, power supply is not

enough.

●

Transmission distance is too far.

User's Manual

381

Questions Reasons

Alarm signal cannot be

disarmed.

●

Alarm setup is not correct.

●

Alarm output has been open manually.

●

Input device error or connection is not correct.

●

Some program versions might have this problem. Upgrade

your system.

Alarm function is null.

●

Alarm setup is not correct.

●

Alarm cable connection is not correct.

●

Alarm input signal is not correct.

●

There are two loops connect to one alarm device.

Record storage period is not

enough.

●

Camera quality is too low. Lens is dirty. Camera is installed

against the light. Camera aperture setup is not correct.

●

HDD capacity is not enough.

●

HDD is damaged.

Cannot playback the

downloaded file.

●

There is no media player.

●

No DXB8.1 or higher graphic acceleration software.

●

There is no DivX503Bundle.exe control when you play the

file transformed to AVI via media player.

●

No DivX503Bundle.exe or ffdshow-2004 1012 .exe in

Windows XP OS.

Forgot local menu operation

password or network

password

Contact your local service engineer or our sales person for

help. We can guide you to solve this problem.

There is no video. The screen is

in black.

●

IPC IP address is not right.

●

IPC port number is not right.

●

IPC account (username/password) is not right.

●

IPC is offline.

The displayed video is not full

in the monitor.

Check current resolution setup. If the current setup is

1920*1080, then you need to set the monitor resolution as

1920*1080.

There is no HDMI output.

●

Displayer is not in HDMI mode.

●

HDMI cable connection is not right.

The video is not fluent when I

view in multiple-channel mode

from the client-end.

●

The network bandwidth is not sufficient. The multiple-

channel monitor operation needs at least 100M or higher.

●

Your PC resources are not sufficient. For 16-ch remote

monitor operation, the PC shall have the following

environment: Quad Core, 2G or higher memory,

independent displayer, display card memory 256M or

higher.

User's Manual

382

Questions Reasons

I cannot connect to the IPC

●

Make sure that the IPC has booted up.

●

IPC network connection is right and it is online

●

IPC IP is in the blocklist.

●

The device has connected to the too many IPC. It cannot

transmit the video.

●

Check the IPC port value and the time zone is the same as

the NVR.

●

Make sure current network environment is stable.

After I set the NVR resolution

as 1080P, my monitor cannot

display.

Shut down the device and then reboot. When you reboot,

press the Fn button at the same time and then release after 5

seconds. You can restore NVR resolution to the default setup.

My admin account has been

changed and I cannot log in.

Use telnet and then input the following command:

cd /mnt/mtd/Config/

rm -rf group

rm -rf password

Reboot the device to restore the default password.

After I login the Web, I cannot

find the remote interface to

add the IPC.

Clear the Web controls and load again.

There is IP and gateway, I can

access the internet via the

router. But I cannot access the

internet after I reboot the NVR.

Use command PING to check you can connect to the gateway

or not. Use telnet to access and then use command "ifconfig–a"

to check device IP address. If you see the subnet mask and the

gateway has changed after the reboot. Upgrade the

applications and set again.

I use the VGA monitor. I want

to know if I use the multiple-

window mode, I see the video

from the main stream or the

sub stream?

●

For 32-channel series product, the 9/16-window is using

the sub stream.

●

For 4/8/16 series product, system is using the main stream

no matter you are in what display mode.

Daily Maintenance

●

Use the brush to clean the board, socket connector and the chassis regularly.

●

The device shall be soundly earthed in case there is audio/video disturbance. Keep the device

away from the static voltage or induced voltage.

●

Unplug the power cable before you remove the audio/video signal cable, RS-232 or RS-485 cable.

●

Do not connect the TV to the local video output port (VOUT). It might result in video output

circuit.

●

Always shut down the device properly. Use the shutdown function in the menu, or you can press

the power button in the rear pane for at least three seconds to shut down the device. Otherwise

it might result in HDD malfunction.

●

Make sure the device is away from the direct sunlight or other heating sources. Keep the sound

ventilation.

●

Check and maintain the device regularly.

User's Manual

383

Appendix 1 HDD Capacity Calculation

Calculate the total capacity needed by each device according to video recording (video recording

type and video file storage time).

1. According to Formula (1) to calculate storage capacity that is the capacity of each channel

needed for each hour, unit Mbyte.

In the formula: means the bit rate, unit Kbit/s

2. After video time requirement is confirmed, according to Formula (2) to calculate the storage

capacity , which is storage of each channel needed unit Mbyte.

In the formula:

means the recording time for each day (hour)

means number of days for which the video shall be kept

3. According to Formula (3) to calculate total capacity (accumulation) that is needed for all

channels in the device during

scheduled video recording

In the formula:

means total number of channels in one device

4. According to Formula (4) to calculate total capacity (accumulation) that is needed for all

channels in device during

alarm video recording (including motion detection)

In the formula: means alarm occurrence rate

User's Manual

384

Appendix 2 Mouse Operation

Appendix Table 2-1 Mouse operation

Operation Description

Left click mouse

When you have selected one menu item, left click mouse to view menu

content.

Modify checkbox or motion detection status.

Click combo box to pop up drop-down list

In input box, you can select input methods. Left click the corresponding

button on the panel you can input numeral/English character (lower

case/upper case). Here

←

stands for backspace button.

＿

stands for

space button.

In English input mode: _ stands for input a backspace icon and

←

stands

for deleting the previous character.

In numeral input mode: _ stands for clear and

←

stands for deleting the

previous numeral.

Double left click

mouse

Implement special control operation such as double click one item in the

file list to playback the video.

In multiple-window mode, double left click one channel to view in full-

window.

Double left click current video again to go back to previous multiple-

window mode.

Right click mouse

In real-time monitor mode, pops up shortcut menu.

Exit current menu without saving the modification.

Press middle button

In numeral input box: Increase or decrease numeral value.

Switch the items in the checkbox.

Page up or page down.

Move mouse Select current control or move control.

Drag mouse

Select motion detection zone.

Select privacy mask zone.

User's Manual

385

Appendix 3 Remote Control

Remote control is not our standard accessory and it is not included in the accessory package.

Appendix Figure 3-1 Remote control

No. Name Function

1 Power button Press this button to boot up or shut down the device.

2 Address

Press this button to input device serial number, so that

you can control the Device.

3 Forward Multi-step forward speed and normal speed playback.

4 Slow motion Multi-step slow motion speed or normal playback.

5 Next record

In playback state, press this button to play back the

next video.

User's Manual

386

No. Name Function

6 Previous record

In playback state, press this button to play back the

previous video.

7 Play/Pause

●

In normal playback state, press this button to

pause playback.

●

In pause state, press this button to resume to

normal playback.

●

In live view window interface, press this button to

enter video search menu.

8 Reverse/pause

In the reverse playback state, press this button to

pause reverse playback.

In the reverse playback pause state, press this button

to resume to playback reversing state.

9 Esc

Go back to previous menu or cancel current operation

(close front interface or control).

10 Record

●

Start or stop record manually.

●

In record interface, use the direction buttons to

select the channel that you want to record.

●

Press this button for at least 1.5 seconds, and the

manual record interface will be displayed.

11 Direction keys

Switch between current activated controls by going

left or right.

In playback state, the keys control the playback

progress bar.

Aux function (such as operating the PTZ menu).

12 Enter/menu key

●

Confirms an operation.

●

Go to the OK button.

●

Go to the menu.

Multiple-window

switch

Switch between multiple-window and one-window.

14 Fn

●

In single-channel monitoring mode, press this

button to display the PTZ control and color setting

functions.

●

Switch the PTZ control menu in PTZ control

interface.

●

In motion detection interface, press this button

with direction keys to complete setup.

●

In text mode, press and hold this button to delete

the last character. To use the clearing function:

Long press this button for 1.5 seconds.

●

In HDD menu, switch HDD recording time and

other information as indicated in the pop-up

message.

User's Manual

387

No. Name Function

15 Alphanumeric keys

●

Input password, numbers.

●

Switch channel.

●

Press Shift to switch the input method.

User's Manual

388

Appendix 4 Compatible Network Camera List

Please note all the models in the following list for reference only. For those products not included in

the list, please contact your local retailer or technical supporting engineer for detailed information.

Appendix Table 4-1 Compatible network camera list

Manufacturer Model Version

Video

Encode

Audio/Vi

deo

Protocol

AXIS

P1346 5.40.9.2 H264 √ ONVIF/Private

P3344/P33

44-E

5.40.9.2 H264 √ ONVIF/Private

P5512

－

H264 √ ONVIF/Private

Q1604 5.40.3.2 H264 √ ONVIF/Private

Q1604-E 5.40.9 H264 √ ONVIF/Private

Q6034E

－

H264 √ ONVIF/Private

Q6035 5.40.9 H264 √ ONVIF/Private

Q1755

－

H264 √ ONVIF/Private

M7001

－

H264 √ Private

M3204 5.40.9.2 H264 √ Private

P3367

HEAD LFP4_0

130220

H264 √ ONVIF

P5532-P

HEAD LFP4_0

130220

H264 √ ONVIF

ACTi

ACM-3511

A1D-220-

V3.12.15-AC

MPEG4 √ Private

ACM-8221

A1D-220-

V3.13.16-AC

MPEG4 √ Private

Arecont

AV1115 65246 H264 √ Private

AV10005D

65197 H264 √ Private

AV2115DN 65246 H264 √ Private

AV2515DN 65199 H264 √ Private

AV2815 65197 H264 √ Private

AV5115DN 65246 H264 √ Private

AV8185DN 65197 H264 √ Private

Bosch

NBN-921-P

－

H264 √ ONVIF

NBC-455-

12P

－

H264 √ ONVIF

VG5-825 9500453 H264 √ ONVIF

User's Manual

389

Manufacturer Model Version

Video

Encode

Audio/Vi

deo

Protocol

NBN-832 66500500 H264 √ ONVIF

VEZ-211-

IWTEIVA

－

H264 √ ONVIF

NBC-255-P 15500152 H264 √ ONVIF

VIP-X1XF －

H264 √ ONVIF

Brikcom

B0100

－

H264 √ ONVIF

D100

－

H264 √ ONVIF

GE-100-CB

－

H264 √ ONVIF

FB-100A v1.0.3.9 H264 √ ONVIF

FD-100A v1.0.3.3 H264 √ ONVIF

Cannon VB-M400

－

H264 √ Private

CNB

MPix2.0DIR

XNETM11201

11229

H264 √ ONVIF

VIPBL1.3MI

RVF

XNETM21001

11229

H264 √ ONVIF

IGC-2050F

XNETM21001

11229

H264 √ ONVIF

CP PLUS

CP-NC9-K 6.E.2.7776 H264 √ ONVIF/Private

CP-NC9W-K 6.E.2.7776 H264 √ Private

CP-ND10-R

cp20111129

ANS

H264 √ ONVIF

CP-ND20-R

cp20111129

ANS

H264 √ ONVIF

CP-NS12W-

cp20110808

H264 √ ONVIF

VS201

cp20111129

H264 √ ONVIF

CP-NB20-R

cp20110808B

H264 √ ONVIF

CP-

NT20VL3-R

cp20110808B

H264 √ ONVIF

CP-NS36W-

cp20110808

H264 √ ONVIF

CP-

ND20VL2-R

cp20110808B

H264 √ ONVIF

CP-RNP-

1820

cp20120821

NSA

H264 √ Private

CP-RNC-

TP20FL3C

cp20120821

NSA

H264 √ Private

User's Manual

390

Manufacturer Model Version

Video

Encode

Audio/Vi

deo

Protocol

CP-RNP-

12D

cp20120828

ANS

H264 √ Private

CP-RNC-

DV10

cp20120821

NSA

H264 √ Private

CP-RNC-

DP20FL2C

cp20120821

NSA

H264 √ Private

Dynacolor

ICS-13

d20120214N

H264 √ ONVIF/Private

ICS-20W

vt20111123N

H264 √ ONVIF/Private

NA222

－

H264 √ ONVIF

MPC-IPVD-

0313

k20111208A

H264 √ ONVIF/Private

MPC-IPVD-

0313AF

k20111208B

H264 √ ONVIF/Private

Honeywell

HIDC-

1100PT

h.2.2.1824 H264 √ ONVIF

HIDC-

1100P

h.2.2.1824 H264 √ ONVIF

HIDC-

0100P

h.2.2.1824 H264 √ ONVIF

HIDC-

1300V

2.0.0.21 H264 √ ONVIF

HICC-

1300W

2.0.1.7 H264 √ ONVIF

HICC-2300 2.0.0.21 H264 √ ONVIF

HDZ20HDX

H20130114N

H264 √ ONVIF

LW342-FP

－

H264 √ Private

LNB5100

－

H264 √ ONVIF

Imatek

KNC-B5000

－

H264 √ Private

KNC-B5162

－

H264 √ Private

KNC-B2161 －

H264 √ Private

Panasonic

NP240/CH

－

MPEG4 √ Private

WV-NP502

－

MPEG4 √ Private

WV-

SP102H

1.41 H264 √ ONVIF/Private

WV-

SP105H

－

H264 √ ONVIF/Private

User's Manual

391

Manufacturer Model Version

Video

Encode

Audio/Vi

deo

Protocol

WV-

SP302H

1.41

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

WV-

SP306H

1.4

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

WV-

SP508H

－

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

WV-

SP509H

－

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

WV-SF332H 1.41

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

WV-

SW316H

1.41

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

WV-

SW355H

1.41

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

WV-

SW352H

－

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

WV-

SW152E

1.03

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

WV-

SW558H

－

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

WV-

SW559H

－

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

WV-

SP105H

1.03

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

WV-

SW155E

1.03

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

WV-SF336H 1.44

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

WV-SF332H 1.41

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

WV-SF132E 1.03

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

WV-SF135E 1.03

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

WV-SF346H 1.41

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

WV-SF342H 1.41

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

WV-

SC385H

1.08

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

WV-

SC386H

1.08

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

User's Manual

392

Manufacturer Model Version

Video

Encode

Audio/Vi

deo

Protocol

WV-SP539 1.66

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF

DG-SC385 1.66

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF

PELCO

IXSOLW

1.8.1-

20110912-

1.9082-

A1.6617

H264 √ Private

IDE20DN

1.7.41.9111-

O3.6725

H264 √ Private

D5118

1.7.8.9310-

A1.5288

H264 √ Private

IM10C10

1.6.13.9261-

O2.4657

H264 √ Private

DD4N-X 01.02.0015 MPEG4 √ Private

DD423-X 01.02.0006 MPEG4 √ Private

D5220

1.8.3-FC2-

20120614-

1.9320-

A1.8035

H264 √ Private

Samsung

SNB-3000P 2.41

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

SNP-3120

1.22_110120

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

SNP-3370 1.21_110318 MPEG4 √ Private

SNB-5000 2.10_111227

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

SND-5080

－

H264,

MPEG4

√ Private

SNZ-5200 1.02_110512

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

SNP-5200 1.04_110825

H264,

MPEG4

√ ONVIF/Private

SNB-7000 1.10_110819 H264 √ ONVIF/Private

SNB-6004 V1.0.0 H264 √ ONVIF

Sony

SNC-DH110 1.50.00 H264 √ ONVIF/Private

SNC-CH120 1.50.00 H264 √ ONVIF/Private

SNC-CH135 1.73.01 H264 √ ONVIF/Private

SNC-CH140 1.50.00 H264 √ ONVIF/Private

SNC-CH210 1.73.00 H264 √ ONVIF/Private

SNC-DH210 1.73.00 H264 √ ONVIF/Private

User's Manual

393

Manufacturer Model Version

Video

Encode

Audio/Vi

deo

Protocol

SNC-DH240 1.50.00 H264 √ ONVIF/Private

SNC-

DH240-T

1.73.01 H264 √ ONVIF/Private

SNC-CH260 1.74.01 H264 √ ONVIF/Private

SNC-CH280 1.73.01 H264 √ ONVIF/Private

SNC-RH-

124

1.73.00 H264 √ ONVIF/Private

SNC-RS46P 1.73.00 H264 √ ONVIF/Private

SNC-ER550 1.74.01 H264 √ ONVIF/Private

SNC-ER580 1.74.01 H264 √ ONVIF/Private

SNC-ER580 1.78.00 H264 √ ONVIF

SNC-

VM631

1.4.0 H264 √ ONVIF

WV-SP306 1.61.00

H264,

MPEG4

√ SDK

WV-SP306 1.61.00 H264 √ ONVIF

SNC-VB600 1.5.0 H264 √ Private

SNC-

VM600

1.5.0 H264 √ Private

SNC-VB630 1.5.0 H264 √ Private

SNC-

VM630

1.5.0 H264 √ Private

SANYO

VCC-

HDN4000P

－

H264 √ ONVIF

User's Manual

394

Appendix 5 Cybersecurity Recommendations

Cybersecurity is more than just a buzzword: it’s something that pertains to every device that is

connected to the internet. IP video surveillance is not immune to cyber risks, but taking basic steps

toward protecting and strengthening networks and networked appliances will make them less

susceptible to attacks. Below are some tips and recommendations from Dahua on how to create a

more secured security system.

Mandatory actions to be taken for basic device network security:

Use Strong Passwords

Please refer to the following suggestions to set passwords:

●

The length should not be less than 8 characters.

●

Include at least two types of characters; character types include upper and lower case letters,

numbers and symbols.

●

Do not contain the account name or the account name in reverse order.

●

Do not use continuous characters, such as 123, abc, etc.

●

Do not use overlapped characters, such as 111, aaa, etc.

Update Firmware and Client Software in Time

●

According to the standard procedure in Tech-industry, we recommend to keep your device

(such as NVR, DVR, IP camera, etc.) firmware up-to-date to ensure the system is equipped with

the latest security patches and fixes. When the device is connected to the public network, it is

recommended to enable the "auto-check for updates" function to obtain timely information

of firmware updates released by the manufacturer.

●

We suggest that you download and use the latest version of client software.

"Nice to have" recommendations to improve your device network security:

Physical Protection

We suggest that you perform physical protection to device, especially storage devices. For

example, place the device in a special computer room and cabinet, and implement well-done

access control permission and key management to prevent unauthorized personnel from

carrying out physical contacts such as damaging hardware, unauthorized connection of

removable device (such as USB flash disk, serial port), etc.

Change Passwords Regularly

We suggest that you change passwords regularly to reduce the risk of being guessed or cracked.

Set and Update Passwords Reset Information Timely

The device supports password reset function. Please set up related information for password

reset in time, including the end user’s mailbox and password protection questions. If the

information changes, please modify it in time. When setting password protection questions, it is

suggested not to use those that can be easily guessed.

Enable Account Lock

The account lock feature is enabled by default, and we recommend you to keep it on to

guarantee the account security. If an attacker attempts to log in with the wrong password several

times, the corresponding account and the source IP address will be locked.

Change Default HTTP and Other Service Ports

We suggest you to change default HTTP and other service ports into any set of numbers between

User's Manual

395

1024–65535, reducing the risk of outsiders being able to guess which ports you are using.

Enable HTTPS

We suggest you to enable HTTPS, so that you visit Web service through a secure communication

channel.

MAC Address Binding

We recommend you to bind the IP and MAC address of the gateway to the device, thus reducing

the risk of ARP spoofing.

Assign Accounts and Privileges Reasonably

According to business and management requirements, reasonably add users and assign a

minimum set of permissions to them.

Disable Unnecessary Services and Choose Secure Modes

If not needed, it is recommended to turn off some services such as SNMP, SMTP, UPnP, etc., to

reduce risks.

If necessary, it is highly recommended that you use safe modes, including but not limited to the

following services:

●

SNMP: Choose SNMP v3, and set up strong encryption passwords and authentication

passwords.

●

SMTP: Choose TLS to access mailbox server.

●

FTP: Choose SFTP, and set up strong passwords.

●

AP hotspot: Choose WPA2-PSK encryption mode, and set up strong passwords.

10.

Audio and Video Encrypted Transmission

If your audio and video data contents are very important or sensitive, we recommend that you

use encrypted transmission function, to reduce the risk of audio and video data being stolen

during transmission.

Reminder: encrypted transmission will cause some loss in transmission efficiency.

11.

Secure Auditing

●

Check online users: we suggest that you check online users regularly to see if the device is

logged in without authorization.

●

Check device log: By viewing the logs, you can know the IP addresses that were used to log in

to your devices and their key operations.

12.

Network Log

Due to the limited storage capacity of the device, the stored log is limited. If you need to save the

log for a long time, it is recommended that you enable the network log function to ensure that

the critical logs are synchronized to the network log server for tracing.

13.

Construct a Safe Network Environment

In order to better ensure the safety of device and reduce potential cyber risks, we recommend:

●

Disable the port mapping function of the router to avoid direct access to the intranet devices

from external network.

●

The network should be partitioned and isolated according to the actual network needs. If

there are no communication requirements between two sub networks, it is suggested to use

VLAN, network GAP and other technologies to partition the network, so as to achieve the

network isolation effect.

●

Establish the 802.1x access authentication system to reduce the risk of unauthorized access to

private networks.

●

Enable IP/MAC address filtering function to limit the range of hosts allowed to access the

User's Manual

396

device.

More information

Please visit Dahua official website security emergency response center for security announcements

and the latest security recommendations.

User's Manual

Dahua NVR2108-8P-4KS2 8 Channel Smart 1U 8PoE Lite 4K H.265 Network Video Recorder

Product's Documents

Dahua Network Video Recorder User's Manual V2.3.0 Eng

Specifications

Dahua NVR2108-8P-4KS2 Questions and Answers